840Dsl CNC Commiss Man en-US

Preface
Fundamental safety
instructions 1
Introduction 2
SINUMERIK
Requirements for
commissioning 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl
CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC,
Drive Licensing 4
PLC commissioning 5
Commissioning Manual
Commissioning NC-
controlled drives 6
Communication between the
NC and the drive 7
NC commissioning 8
Configuring PLC-controlled
drives 9
Drive tuning 10
Saving and managing data 11
New installation / upgrading 12
Appendix A
Valid for:
SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl
CNC software Version 4.92
06/2019
A5E44860208B AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG A5E44860208B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2006 - 2019.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 05/2019 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized into the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Further information
You can find information on the topics at the following address (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108464614):
● Order documentation / documentation overview
● Additional links for downloading documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
If there are any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions,
corrections), please send an email to the following address
(mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com).
mySupport/Documentation
At the following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation),
you can find information on how to create your own individual documentation based on
Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation.
Training
At the following address (http://www.siemens.com/sitrain), you can find information about
SITRAIN (Siemens training on products, systems and solutions for automation and drives).
FAQs
You can find answers to Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages at Product
Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/ps/faq).
SINUMERIK
You can find information about SINUMERIK at the following address (http://www.siemens.com/
sinumerik).
CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

Commissioning Manual, 06/2019, A5E44860208B AB 3
Preface
Target group
This document is intended for commissioning personnel.
The plant or system is installed, connected, and ready to start. The Commissioning Manual
contains all the necessary information or at least references for the following steps, e.g.
configuring the individual components.
Standard scope
This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Additions or
revisions made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This
does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new delivery or when
servicing.
For the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all
types of the product, and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation, or
maintenance.
Note regarding the General Data Protection Regulation

Siemens observes standard data protection principles, in particular the principle of privacy by
design. For this product, this means: this product does not process / store any personal data,
only technical functional data (e.g. time stamps). If a user links this data with other data (e.g.
shift schedules) or stores personal data on the same storage medium (e.g. hard disk), and thus
establishes a link to a person or persons, then the user is responsible for ensuring compliance
with the relevant data protection regulations.
Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet at the
following address in the Contact (https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2090)
area.
EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at the
following address (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14604/cert).

4 Commissioning Manual, 06/2019, A5E44860208B AB
Table of contents
Preface .........................................................................................................................................................3
1 Fundamental safety instructions.................................................................................................................11
1.1 General safety instructions.....................................................................................................11
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ......................................15
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ......................................................................16
1.4 Industrial security ...................................................................................................................17
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems ...................................................................................19
2 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................21
2.1 Overview of the manuals for SINUMERIK 840D sl ................................................................21
2.2 SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration ........................................................................................22
2.3 Procedure for the initial commissioning .................................................................................24
2.4 Procedure when tuning axes and drives ................................................................................26
3 Requirements for commissioning ...............................................................................................................27
3.1 General prerequisites.............................................................................................................27
3.2 Software and hardware preconditions....................................................................................28
3.3 Position of the interfaces........................................................................................................29
3.4 Power-On and boot-up...........................................................................................................30
3.4.1 NC and PLC memory reset ....................................................................................................30
3.4.2 A general reset is separately performed for the NC and PLC................................................32
3.4.3 Boot completed ......................................................................................................................34
3.5 Access levels .........................................................................................................................35
4 Licensing ....................................................................................................................................................39
4.1 SINUMERIK License Key.......................................................................................................39
4.2 Web License Manager ...........................................................................................................41
4.3 License database ...................................................................................................................42
4.4 How to perform the assignment .............................................................................................43
4.5 Important licensing terms .......................................................................................................44
5 PLC commissioning....................................................................................................................................47
5.1 Connect PG/PC with the PLC ................................................................................................47
5.2 Creating a SIMATIC S7 project (PROFIBUS) ........................................................................48
5.2.1 SIMATIC S7 project overview ................................................................................................48
5.2.2 Inserting SINUMERIK NCU to the HW Config .......................................................................49
5.2.3 Configuring interfaces ............................................................................................................52

Table of contents
5.2.4 Augmenting the machine control panel and handwheel in the HW configuration ..................58
5.2.5 Modifying PROFIBUS machine control panel in OB100 ........................................................60
5.2.6 Configuring the Web server ...................................................................................................62
5.2.7 Inserting an NX to the hardware configuration.......................................................................63
5.2.8 End the hardware configuration and load it to the PLC..........................................................65
5.3 Extending the SIMATIC S7 project (PROFINET)...................................................................66
5.3.1 Requirements when configuring PROFINET .........................................................................66
5.3.2 Sample configuration .............................................................................................................68
5.3.3 Commissioning the PLC.........................................................................................................70
5.3.4 Configuring PROFIsafe ..........................................................................................................76
5.3.5 Complete the PLC project ......................................................................................................78
5.4 Creating a PLC program ........................................................................................................81
5.4.1 Preconditions for creating the PLC program ..........................................................................83
5.4.2 Insert PLC basic program ......................................................................................................83
5.4.3 Modifying machine control panel in OB100............................................................................85
5.5 Download the project to the PLC ...........................................................................................87
5.6 Loading PLC symbols to the controller ..................................................................................89
5.7 First commissioning of the PLC completed............................................................................90
5.8 Configuring a network (NetPro) for PG/PC ............................................................................91
5.8.1 Integrating PG/PC into NetPro ...............................................................................................91
5.8.2 Configuration of the PG/PC interface.....................................................................................92
5.8.3 Assigning interfaces ...............................................................................................................95
5.8.4 Loading the HW config to NCU ..............................................................................................96
6 Commissioning NC-controlled drives .........................................................................................................99
6.1 Configuration examples .........................................................................................................99
6.1.1 Example: Configuration of the drive components ..................................................................99
6.1.2 Example: Parallel connection with TM120 ...........................................................................101
6.2 Terminal assignment............................................................................................................103
6.2.1 NCU terminal assignment ....................................................................................................103
6.2.2 X122 terminal assignment....................................................................................................103
6.2.5 Terminal assignment NX1x.3 ...............................................................................................105
6.2.6 Support for the terminal assignment ....................................................................................106
6.2.7 BICO interconnections .........................................................................................................107
6.3 Guided commissioning of SINAMICS drives........................................................................109
6.3.1 Initializing the system ...........................................................................................................109
6.3.2 Device configuration of the drive system .............................................................................111
6.3.3 Configuring the infeed ..........................................................................................................113
6.3.4 Configuration of two infeeds connected in parallel...............................................................120
6.3.5 Configuring drive components .............................................................................................123
6.3.6 Commissioning catalog motors with encoder using SMC ...................................................125
6.3.7 Commissioning a third-party motor with encoder via SMC ..................................................131
6.3.8 First commissioning of SINAMICS drive ended ...................................................................138
6.4 Manual commissioning of SINAMICS drives........................................................................139
6.4.1 Introduction to commissioning of SINAMICS drives.............................................................139
6.4.2 Activate the factory settings .................................................................................................141

Table of contents
6.4.3 Firmware update of the drive components...........................................................................143

6.4.4 Automatic device configuration ............................................................................................145
6.4.5 Commissioning using a drive wizard....................................................................................149
6.5 Configuring data sets ...........................................................................................................150
6.5.1 Data sets - overview.............................................................................................................150
6.5.2 Adding a data set .................................................................................................................151
6.5.3 Remove data set ..................................................................................................................155
6.5.4 Modify data set.....................................................................................................................158
6.6 Diagnostics → Trace .............................................................................................................159
6.6.1 Selecting variables for tracing ..............................................................................................159
6.6.2 Example: Trace session with servo variables ......................................................................160
6.6.3 Example: Zooming in/zooming out.......................................................................................163
6.6.4 Example: Changing the scale ..............................................................................................167
6.6.5 Example: Positioning the cursor...........................................................................................168
6.6.6 Example: Trace session with PLC variables ........................................................................168
6.6.7 Example: Trace session with drive variables .......................................................................170
6.6.8 Key combinations to use the trace .......................................................................................171
6.7 Diagnostics → drive system ..................................................................................................173
6.8 Modular machine..................................................................................................................175
6.8.1 What does "modular machine" mean? .................................................................................175
6.8.2 Example: Topology display (graphic) ...................................................................................179
6.8.3 Modify configuration .............................................................................................................182
6.8.4 Check topology ....................................................................................................................184
6.8.5 Changing topology ...............................................................................................................185
6.8.6 Activating or deactivating a drive object...............................................................................187
6.8.7 Deleting a drive object..........................................................................................................189
6.8.8 Delete the component ..........................................................................................................191
6.8.9 Adding components .............................................................................................................193
6.8.10 Replacing a SINAMICS S120 component............................................................................195
6.8.11 Example: Subsequently installing a component...................................................................197
6.9 Tips for commissioning the SINAMICS drives .....................................................................200
6.9.1 Firmware version display of drive components ....................................................................200
6.9.2 Check the line data of the infeed..........................................................................................201
6.9.3 Identifying the infeed automatically or manually ..................................................................202
6.9.4 Rules for wiring the DRIVE-CLiQ interface ..........................................................................203
6.9.5 Drive-object assignment for PROFIBUS connection............................................................205
6.9.6 Adjusting speed and brake behavior....................................................................................209
7 Communication between the NC and the drive ........................................................................................211
7.1 Overview of NC and drive communication ...........................................................................211
7.2 Configuring the communication to the drive.........................................................................212
7.3 Configuring the I/O address and telegram ...........................................................................214
7.4 Process data transfer between the NC and drive ................................................................216
7.5 Drives: Assign axis...............................................................................................................218
7.6 Configuring machine axes....................................................................................................221
7.6.1 Axis assignment ...................................................................................................................221
7.6.2 Axis names...........................................................................................................................224

Table of contents
7.6.3 Drive assignment .................................................................................................................225

8 NC commissioning....................................................................................................................................227
8.1 Machine and setting data .....................................................................................................227
8.2 Procedure when commissioning the NC ..............................................................................229
8.3 Memory configuration...........................................................................................................231
8.4 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics ............................................................232
8.4.1 Axis selection and status display .........................................................................................233
8.4.2 Friction compensation - automatic tuning ............................................................................234
8.4.3 Friction compensation - manual tuning ................................................................................235
8.4.4 Data list ................................................................................................................................238
8.4.5 Example for a linear axis (automatic tuning) ........................................................................238
8.4.6 Friction compensation with torque injection pulse................................................................240
8.5 Nodding compensation ........................................................................................................242
8.5.1 Measuring technique and machine data ..............................................................................242
8.5.2 Nodding compensation - overview .......................................................................................244
8.5.3 Determining compliance from the best milling path .............................................................245
8.5.4 Nodding compensation - manually enter..............................................................................246
8.5.5 Determining compliance using a probe................................................................................247
8.5.6 Example: Traveling column machine ...................................................................................249
8.6 Adaptations ..........................................................................................................................251
8.6.1 Intelligent load adjustment – function ...................................................................................251
8.6.2 Intelligent dynamic response adjustment – function.............................................................253
8.6.3 Commissioning the function .................................................................................................255
8.6.4 Example: Enter an adaptation for acceleration ....................................................................257
8.7 Diagnosis → System utilization .............................................................................................259
9 Configuring PLC-controlled drives............................................................................................................261
9.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................261
9.2 Configuration via PROFIBUS...............................................................................................262
9.2.1 Supplementary conditions for PLC-controlled drives ...........................................................262
9.2.2 Example: Configuration of the drive components ................................................................264
9.2.3 Commissioning the PLC.......................................................................................................265
9.3 Creating a PLC program ......................................................................................................271
9.4 Commissioning PLC drives ..................................................................................................273
9.5 Checking the communication to the drive ............................................................................275
9.6 Safety functions for PLC drives............................................................................................276
9.6.1 Configuring PROFIsafe ........................................................................................................276
9.6.2 Example: Embedding in safe programmable logic (SPL).....................................................279
10 Drive tuning ..............................................................................................................................................283
10.1 Tuning procedure .................................................................................................................283
10.2 Function overview for the tuning ..........................................................................................284
10.3 Automatic servo tuning.........................................................................................................285
10.3.1 Setting the options for the measurement procedure ............................................................285
10.3.2 Selecting the tuning strategy................................................................................................288

Table of contents
10.3.3 Example: How to tune the X1 axis .......................................................................................293

10.3.4 Example: How to tune the Z1 axis .......................................................................................297
10.3.5 Example: This is how you start to tune the path interpolation..............................................300
10.3.6 Example of a report .............................................................................................................304
10.3.7 Example for experts: Axis tuning..........................................................................................307
10.4 Measuring functions (manual tuning) ...................................................................................311
10.4.1 Measurement of current control loop ...................................................................................313
10.4.2 Speed control loop measurement ........................................................................................315
10.4.3 Example: Setting the filter for the following error (speed control loop).................................319
10.4.4 Position control loop measurement......................................................................................320
10.4.5 Examples for the measuring methods (position control loop) ..............................................323
10.4.6 Function generator ...............................................................................................................325
10.4.7 Example, function generator: Speed setpoint after the filter ................................................327
10.5 Define filter ...........................................................................................................................329
10.6 Circularity test ......................................................................................................................330
10.6.1 Circularity test: Function.......................................................................................................330
10.6.2 Circularity test: Performing the measurement......................................................................331
10.6.3 Circularity test: Examples.....................................................................................................333
10.6.4 Circularity test: Saving data .................................................................................................336
10.7 Decision-making support for APC and APC ECO................................................................338
11 Saving and managing data.......................................................................................................................341
11.1 Saving data ..........................................................................................................................341
11.1.1 Backup of PLC data .............................................................................................................343
11.1.2 Creating a commissioning archive .......................................................................................344
11.2 Managing data .....................................................................................................................346
11.2.1 How to transfer data within the controller.............................................................................347
11.2.2 To save and load data..........................................................................................................347
11.2.3 How to compare data ...........................................................................................................348
11.2.4 Example: Importing/exporting SINAMICS lists.....................................................................349
12 New installation / upgrading .....................................................................................................................351
12.1 With the help of an NCU service system..............................................................................351
12.1.1 New installation ....................................................................................................................351
12.1.1.1 Automatic installation of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive .....................................352
12.1.1.2 Installation of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive ......................................................353
12.1.1.3 Installation of the CNC software using WinSCP on PC/PG .................................................356
12.1.1.4 Installation of the CNC software using VNC Viewer on PC/PG ...........................................357
12.1.2 Upgrading.............................................................................................................................358
12.1.2.1 Backup/Restore....................................................................................................................359
12.1.2.2 Automatic upgrade of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive .........................................362
12.1.2.3 Upgrading the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive...........................................................363
12.1.2.4 Upgrading the CNC software using WinSCP on PC/PG......................................................366
12.1.2.5 Upgrading the CNC software using VNC Viewer on PC/PG................................................367
12.2 With the help of the "Create MyConfig" software .................................................................368
12.2.1 Reinstallation with Create MyConfig ....................................................................................368
12.2.2 Upgrade with Create MyConfig ............................................................................................372

Table of contents
A Appendix...................................................................................................................................................377
A.1 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................377
A.2 Information about third-party software used.........................................................................379
A.3 Documentation overview SINUMERIK 840D sl....................................................................381
Index.........................................................................................................................................................383

Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
● Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
● Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.
WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
● Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.

Fundamental safety instructions
WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result
in death or severe injury.
● Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
● Do not use any damaged devices.
WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
● As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of cables that are not used at one end
at the grounded housing potential.
WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
● Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
In the event of fire outbreak, the enclosures of built-in devices cannot prevent the escape of
fire and smoke. This can result in serious personal injury or property damage.
● Install built-in units in a suitable metal cabinet in such a way that personnel are protected
against fire and smoke, or take other appropriate measures to protect personnel.
● Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by radio devices or mobile phones
When radio devices or mobile phones with a transmission power > 1 W are used in the
immediate vicinity of components, they may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Malfunctions may impair the functional safety of machines and can therefore put people in
danger or lead to property damage.
● If you come closer than around 2 m to such components, switch off any radios or mobile
phones.
● Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.
WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire
and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
● Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.
NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
● Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.
WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
● Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
● Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
● Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
● Perform a function test.
● Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions relevant
to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important safety notices for Safety Integrated functions
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the safety notices in the Safety
Integrated manuals.
WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
● Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
● Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.
NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
● Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
● Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
● Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration,
equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific
customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are operated
correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe handling when
using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

1.4 Industrial security
Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Products and solutions from Siemens constitute one element of such a
concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the Internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary and
only when appropriate security measures (e.g. using firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that can be implemented, please
visit:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they become
available, and that only the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are
no longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed at:
Industrial security (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity)
Further information is provided on the Internet:

Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
● Keep the software up to date.
● Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
● Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
● Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
● On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.
● Protect the drive against unauthorized changes by activating the "Know-how protection"
converter function.

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components
of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables
and connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic
components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Software errors
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Condensation/conductive contamination
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk
to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or
data communication via the network
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the relevant
sections in the technical user documentation.


Introduction 2
2.1 Overview of the manuals for SINUMERIK 840D sl
Steps for commissioning SINUMERIK 840D sl

Commissioning a SINUMERIK 840D sl is performed in two basic steps:
&RQILJXUH3/&ORDGEDVLF
SURJUDP

&RQILJXUHGULYHV
1&&RQILJXUHWKHPDFKLQH
&UHDWLQJD3/&SURJUDP
*HQHUDOPDFKLQH
GDWD
&KDQQHOVSHFLILF 'LVSOD\PDFKLQH
PDFKLQHGDWD 1&IXQFWLRQV
GDWD
$[LVPDFKLQHGDWD
&\FOHV *8'PDFURV
Figure 2-1 Commissioning process
Step 1: Commissioning the NC, PLC, drive

● Commissioning Manual: CNC commissioning: NC, PLC, drive
● Function manuals: Basic functions, extension functions, special functions, synchronized
actions
● Safety Integrated Function Manual: Commissioning with Safety Integrated
Step 2: Commissioning NC functions, PLC program and machine data
● List manuals: Machine data, interface signals, variables

Introduction
2.2 SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration
SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration with SINAMICS S120 Booksize
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.RSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWZLWK7&8 6,180(5,.

+7 3&8
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86,2
'5,9(&/L4
6,180(5,.'VOZLWK 1; 6,1$0,&66

6,1$0,&66
•••
3RZHUVXSSO\
•••
6HUYRPRWRUV 0DLQVSLQGOHPRWRU
Figure 2-2 Example: Configuration with SINAMICS S120 Booksize

Introduction
SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration with SINAMICS S120 Combi

6,180(5,.RSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWZLWK7&8
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.3&8
+7 ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
33'31
33b'b$b31
6,0$7,&
(7SUR
352),1(7
'5,9(&/L4
6,180(5,.'VO 6,1$0,&66
6,1$0,&66
3RZHUVXSSO\ 1&8%31 0RWRU0RGXOH
&RPEL
ERRNVL]HFRPSDFW
IRUPDW
6SLQGOHPRWRU3+ ).IHHG ).IHHG

PRWRUV PRWRUV
Figure 2-3 Example: Configuration with SINAMICS S120 Combi
Note
SINAMICS S120 Combi
The configuration with SINAMICS S120 Combi is permissible only on an NCU 710.3B PN.

Introduction
2.3 Procedure for the initial commissioning
Checking the system

The mechanical and electrical installation of the system must be completed.
The following is important when starting commissioning:
● The control system with its components boots error-free.
● The EMC guidelines were carefully maintained when configuring the system.
Variants for the commissioning process

When commissioning the system for the first time, the following dependencies to the CNC
software on the CompactFlash card are considered:
● CompactFlash card with current CNC software
● CompactFlash card without CNC software ⇒ new installation
● CompactFlash card with older CNC software ⇒ upgrade
Commissioning with current CNC software
Sequence Reference to Chapter

① Powering up the control system with NC/PLC general reset → NC/PLC general reset (Page 30)
② Make a communication connection to the PLC → Establishing a communication connection (Page 47)
③ Commission the PLC → PLC commissioning (Page 47)
④ Commission the SINAMICS drive system → Commissioning NC-controlled drives (Page 99)
⑤ NC ↔ drive communication → Communication between the NC and the drive (Page 211)
⑥ Commission the NC:
● Assign the NC machine data for the communication → NC commissioning (Page 227)
● Scale the machine data
● Parameterize the axis data → Procedure when commissioning the NC (Page 229)
● Parameterize the spindle data
● Parameterize the measuring systems
⑦ Drive tuning → Drive tuning (Page 283)
Reinstallation of the CNC software

① Install the CNC software on the CompactFlash card using one of → New installation / upgrade (Page 351)
the following media:
● Bootable USB FlashDrive
● WinSCP on PC/PG
● VNC viewer on PC/PG
② Powering up the control system with NC/PLC general reset → NC/PLC general reset (Page 30)
③ Establish a communication connection to the PLC → Establishing a communication connection (Page 47)
④ Commission the PLC → PLC commissioning (Page 47)

Introduction

⑤ Commission the SINAMICS drive system → Commissioning NC-controlled drives (Page 99)
⑥ NC ↔ drive communication → Communication between the NC and the drive (Page 211)
⑦ Commission the NC:
● Assign the NC machine data for the communication → NC commissioning (Page 227)
● Scale the machine data
● Parameterize the axis data → Procedure when commissioning the NC (Page 229)
● Parameterize the spindle data
● Parameterize the measuring systems
⑧ Drive tuning → Drive tuning (Page 283)
Upgrading the CNC software

① Archive the NC, PLC, HMI and drive data → Save data (Page 341)
② Upgrade CNC software using: → New installation / upgrade (Page 351)
● Access MyMachine /P2P
● WinSCP and VNC Viewer
③ Load the archived NC, PLC, HMI and drive data → Load data (Page 341)

Introduction
2.4 Procedure when tuning axes and drives
2.4 Procedure when tuning axes and drives
Requirement
Once the drives have been commissioned and the axes assigned, you must start tuning the
particular machine or a machine type.
● The drives have been commissioned: the axes move.
● The topology has been checked and is OK.
Recommended tuning sequence

/FB2/: Function Manual Expansion functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/
view/109763228)
Sequence: Reference to the corresponding chapter:

Automatic servo tuning Automatic servo tuning (Page 285)
⇒ including following error compensation /FB2/ K3: Dynamic feedforward control (following error compensa‐
tion)
Automatic servo tuning: Path interpolation Example for path interpolation (Page 300)
Optional: Manual calibration of the controller using measuring func‐ Measuring functions (manual tuning) (Page 311)
tions
Circularity test Circularity test (Page 330)
● Motor encoder
● Measuring system (encoder 1, encoder 2)
1-axis compensations:
Interpolatory compensation /FB2/ K3: Leadscrew error and measuring system error compensa‐
● Lead screw error compensation tion
● Measuring system error compensation

Temperature compensation /FB2/ K3: Temperature compensation
Backlash compensation: /FB2/ K3: Backlash compensation
● Mechanical
● Dynamic
● Dual position feedback
Friction compensation /FB2/ K3: Friction compensation with a constant compensation value
Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics (Page 232)
Nodding compensation Nodding compensation (Page 242)
Multi-axis compensations:
Cylinder error compensation (only for cylindrical grinding) /FB2/ K3: Cylinder error compensation
Sag compensation /FB2/ K3: Sag and angularity error compensation
Compensation in space (option) ---
Volumetric Compensation System (RMCC/VCS)
Volumetric compensation interface (option) ---
Volumetric compensation interface (RMCCI/VCI)

Requirements for commissioning 3
3.1 General prerequisites
Prerequirements for components involved

The complete system is connected mechanically and electrically, and has been verified in the
following points:
● All ESD measures are observed for the design of the components.
● All screws are tightened with their prescribed torque.
● All connectors are plugged correctly and locked/screwed.
● All components are grounded and connected to shields.
● The load capacity of the central power supply is taken into account.
Limit values
All components are dimensioned for defined mechanical, climatic and electrical environmental
conditions. No limit value may be exceeded, neither during operation, nor during transportation.
Special attention must be paid to the limit values:
● Power supply conditions
● Pollution burden
● Function-impairing gases
● Ambient environmental conditions
● Storage/transport
● Shock stressing
● Vibration stressing
● Ambient temperature
References
You can find further details in the following manuals:
● Installing the SINAMICS S120 drive components: SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual /
GH2/ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763282)
● Connecting the interfaces: SINUMERIK 840D sl Equipment Manual NCU 7x0.3B PN
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/99922219)

Requirements for commissioning
3.2 Software and hardware preconditions
3.2 Software and hardware preconditions

For the commissioning of SINUMERIK 840D sl, the following points are required:
● Hardware requirements
– NCU with TCU
– CompactFlash card
– Dual fan/battery module for NCU
– Optional: PCU 50.5 with Windows 7 and operator panel
Note
For the operation of SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU without TCU, the "HMI"
subsystem for SINUMERIK Operate on the NCU must be switched off.
● Connection to NCU
– Network switch to X120
– Ethernet machine control panel to socket X120
– Ethernet connection from PG/PC to X120 or X127 for commissioning the PLC
– Ethernet connection from the TCU to the Ethernet machine control panel
– Optional: Ethernet connection from the PCU to the Ethernet machine control panel
● Software requirements
– CNC software with SINUMERIK Operate
– Optional: SINUMERIK Operate for operation on the PCU
– SIMATIC STEP 7 on PG/PC (engineering system)
– SINUMERIK 840D sl Toolbox for STEP 7 package
– GSD files (Toolbox)
Note
The part numbers of the SINAMICS drives, encoders and motors should be available for
parameterization.

3.3 Position of the interfaces
3.3 Position of the interfaces
Interfaces on the NCU

The NCU has the following interfaces:
;
;
;;;
;
;
;
;
; ;
;; ;
;
X100 ... X105 DRIVE-CLiQ for SINAMICS drive components

X124 +24 V DC external power supply
X125, X135 USB only for commissioning and servicing
X120 Industrial Ethernet for connection to a system network
(TCU and/or PCU)
X130 Industrial Ethernet for connection to a company network
X127 Industrial Ethernet service interface for PG/PC
X136 PROFIBUS DP / MPI
X126 PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DP (for example for PLC axes)
X150-1, X150-2 PROFINET IO for PROFINET components
X122, X132, X142 Based on PROFINET Digital inputs/outputs for I/O devices
Figure 3-1 Position of the interfaces

3.4 Power-On and boot-up
3.4.1 NC and PLC memory reset
SVC/NCK and PLC rotary switches

The NCU has two rotary switches in the lower section of the front panel.
The settings on the SVC/NCK switch have the following meaning:
Switch position NC operating mode

0 NC normal boot-up
1 NC boot-up with default values (= memory reset)
2 The NC (and PLC) boots up with the data that was saved at the last shutdown
7 Debug mode (NC is not started)
8 IP address of the NCU is displayed on the seven-segment display
All others Not relevant
The settings on the PLC switch have the same meaning as for a SIMATIC S7-CPU:
Switch position Operating mode of the PLC

0 RUN
1 RUN (protected mode)
2 STOP
3 Memory reset (MRES)
All others Not relevant

Initial commissioning
In order to achieve a defined state of the complete system, for the initial commissioning of the
NCU, a general reset of the NC and the PLC must be performed.
Note
In the following cases, a general PLC reset must always be performed:
● Initial commissioning
● Module replacement
● General reset request by the PLC
● Upgrading the PLC
Procedure:
1. Set the rotary switch of the NCU to the following settings:
– NCK commissioning switch: Switch position "1"
– PLC mode selector: Switch position "3"
2. Initiate a power-on reset by switching-off the control and switching-on again – or by pressing
the Reset button on the front of the NCU. The NC is shut down and is restarted with the
request for a general reset.
Effect:
– The "STOP" LED flashes.
– The "SF" LED illuminates continuously.
3. Within approx. three seconds, turn the PLC mode selector switch to the positions "2" → "3"
→ "2".
Effect:
– The "STOP" LED first flashes with about 2 Hz and then illuminates continuously.
4. Turn the PLC mode selector switch back to the "0" position.
Effect:
– The "STOP" LED extinguishes.
– The "RUN" LED flashes initially and then illuminates green continuously.
5. Turn the NCK commissioning selector switch back to the "0" position.

Result
The NC has now been generally reset and is in the following state:
● NC
– The user data is deleted.
– The system data is initialized.
– The standard machine data is loaded.
● PLC
The general reset places the PLC in a defined initial state:
– The user data has been deleted (data and program blocks).
– The system data blocks (SDB) have been deleted.
– The diagnostics buffer and the MPI parameters have been reset.
The "RUN" LED illuminates. NC and PLC are in cyclic operation.
Note
PLC general reset
If a general PLC reset is performed using a power-on reset, then the user data must again be
transferred to the PLC, e.g. via a programming device (PG).
After the PLC general reset, no PLC start is performed and at least the following alarm issued:
● Alarm: "2001 PLC not booted"
These alarms have no influence on the next steps.
3.4.2 A general reset is separately performed for the NC and PLC
General reset of the NC

Carry out the following actions to perform an NC general reset:
1. Turn the NCK commissioning switch on the front of the NCU to position "1".
2. Initiate a power on reset by switching-off the control system and switching-on again – or by
pressing the reset button on the front of the NCU (labeled "RESET"). The system is shut
down and is restarted with the request for a general reset of the NC.
3. After the system has booted, turn the NCK commissioning switch back to position "0".
Effect:
– The number "6" and a flashing point are output on the 7-segment display on the front of
the NCU.
– LED "RUN" lights up.

The NCU is in the following state after an error-free boot-up:

● The NC is in cyclic operation.
● The static memory of the NC is deleted.
● The machine data is preassigned standard values.
Alternatives
A PLC general reset can be performed with or without power-on reset. Depending on this,
various states are obtained for the PLC program.
General PLC reset without a power-on reset

Carry out the following actions to execute a general PLC reset without a power-on reset:
1. Turn the PLC mode selector switch on the front of the NCU to position "2" (STOP).
Effect:
– The PLC goes into the "STOP" mode.
– The "STOP" LED illuminates.
2. Turn the PLC mode selector switch to position "3" (MRES)
Effect:
– The "STOP" LED goes dark and after approx. three seconds illuminates again.
→ "2"
Effect:
Effect:
– The "RUN" LED illuminates.
The general reset places the PLC in a defined state:
● The PLC is in cyclic operation.
● The time of day and the operating hours counter have not been reset.
● The diagnostics buffer and the MPI parameters have not been reset.
Note
For the general reset without power-on reset, the most recently loaded blocks from the PLC
program are reimported.

General PLC reset with power-on reset

Carry out the following actions to execute a general PLC resetwith a power-on reset:
1. Turn the PLC mode selector on the front of the NCU to position "3" (MRES).
2. Initiate a power-on reset by switching-off the control and switching-on again – or by pressing
the Reset button on the front of the NCU. The NCU is terminated and with the request for a
general reset is restarted.
Effect:
– The "STOP" LED flashes.
– The "SF" LED illuminates continuously.
→ "2".
Effect:
Effect:
– The "RUN" LED flashes initially and then illuminates green continuously.
The general reset places the PLC in a defined state:
● The user data has been deleted (data and program blocks).
● The system data blocks (SDB) have been deleted.
● The diagnostics buffer and the MPI parameters have been reset.
3.4.3 Boot completed
Boot completed without error

After an error-free boot of the NCU, the following status is displayed:
● The number "6" and a flashing point
● The "RUN" LED illuminates green continuously.
In the following step, commissioning of the PLC is done with the SIMATIC Manager.

3.5 Access levels
3.5 Access levels
Access to functions and machine data

The access concept controls access to functions and data areas. Access levels 0 to 7 are
available, where 0 represents the highest level and 7 the lowest level. Access levels 0 to 3 are
locked using a password and 4 to 7 using the appropriate key-operated switch.
Access level Locked by Area Data class

1 Password: SUNRISE Manufacturer Manufacturer (M)
2 Password: EVENING Service Individual (I)
3 Password: CUSTOMER User User (U)
4 Key-operated switch setting 3 Programmer, machine setter User (U)
5 Key-operated switch setting 2 Qualified operator User (U)
6 Key-operated switch setting 1 Trained operator User (U)
7 Key-operated switch setting 0 Semi-skilled operator User (U)
The password remains valid until it is reset with the "Delete Password" softkey. The passwords
can be changed after activation.
If, for example, the passwords are no longer known, reinitialization (boot-up with "NCK default
data") must be carried out. This resets all passwords to the default (see table). A power-on reset
does not reset the password.
Key-operated switch
Access levels 4 to 7 require a corresponding key-operated switch setting on the machine
control panel. Three keys of different colors are provided for this purpose. Each of these keys
only provides access to certain areas.
Access level Switch position Key color

4-7 0 to 3 Red
5-7 0 to 2 Green
6-7 0 and 1 Black
7 0 = Key removal position No key inserted
The position of the key-operated switch can be processed by the PLC program, and
appropriately transferred to the NC/PLC interface .

3.5 Access levels
Set password
Procedure:
1. Select the "Commissioning" operating area and press the "Password" softkey.
2. Press the "Set password" softkey. The current key-operated switch setting is displayed first:
3. Enter the password for the desired access level and confirm this input with "OK" or with the
<INPUT> button.
A valid password is acknowledged as set and the access level is set. Invalid passwords will
be rejected.
Pressing the "Delete password" softkey deletes the last valid password and displays the
current key-operated switch setting again.
Note
Delete password
The password can also be deleted via the → PI service: LOGOUT: Function Manual, Basic
Functions
Rules relating to the password structure

The following rules must be observed when assigning a new password:
● The password has a length of between 8 and 32 characters.
● A password must contain at least one number, at least one uppercase letter, and at least
one lowercase letter.
● A password may contain the following characters:
– Special characters (ASCII 0x20 to 0x7E)
– Uppercase characters
– Lowercase characters
– Numbers
● A new password must not have any similarity to the following data:
– User name
– Computer name
– Additional user data (GECOS data that can be additionally saved under Linux.)

3.5 Access levels
This information can also be found in the online help of SINUMERIK Operate.
Change password
NOTICE
Change password
Observe the following "Rules relating to the password structure" for the selection of the new
password.
Note the following changes in the handling of passwords:
● A password that has been changed cannot be reset to a default password.
● After a software upgrade to version 4.8 SP3, the passwords valid under Linux
apply immediately in the NC.
● In the following cases, the default passwords in the delivery condition are no longer valid
in the NC and have been replaced by the currently valid passwords under Linux:
– After importing a startup archive
– After a memory reset of the NC
Procedure:
1. To change the default password from the delivery condition, press the "Change password"
softkey.
2. The previous password must first be confirmed. After successful authentication, you are
forwarded automatically to the following dialog:
3. Enter the new password and the repetition, and then confirm with the "OK" softkey. If both
passwords match, the new password becomes valid and is adopted by the system.

3.5 Access levels
Password forgotten?
NOTICE
Password forgotten?
Assigning a new password to replace a forgotten password is a very time-consuming process,
in particular, an unavailable password hinders a service job.
Therefore, please take appropriate actions to ensure that the assigned passwords are
available for a service job.
If the password is no longer available, please contact the supplier.

Licensing 4
4.1 SINUMERIK License Key
Basic information on license keys

If a license is required for a product, then with the purchase of the license the purchaser
receives a CoL as proof for the rights to use this product and a corresponding license key as to
the "technical representative" of this license. In conjunction with software products, the license
key usually must be available on the hardware on which the software product is executed.
Note
Trial license
A trial license supports "short-term use" of the software in a non-productive context, e.g. use for
testing and evaluation purposes; it can be transitioned into another license.
SINUMERIK license keys

Depending on the software product, there are license keys with different technical properties.
The essential properties of a SINUMERIK license key are:
● Hardware serial number
Via the hardware serial number contained in the SINUMERIK License Key, there is a direct
relationship between the License Key and the hardware on which it may be used. That
means a License Key that was generated for the hardware serial number of a certain
CompactFlash card is also only valid on this CompactFlash card and rejected as invalid on
another CompactFlash card.
● Total number of assigned licenses
A SINUMERIK license key not only refers to a single license, instead it is the "technical
representative" of all licenses that are assigned to the hardware at the time of its generation.
Content of the CompactFlash card

The CompactFlash card contains the system and user software, the retentive system and user
data, along with the data relevant for the license management of SINUMERIK software
products of a control system:
● License information including the license key
The CompactFlash card thus represents the identity of a SINUMERIK controller. For this
reason, assigning licenses to a controller always occurs using the hardware serial number.
This has the advantage that the CompactFlash card can be inserted into a replacement NCU
in the event of failure and all data is retained.

Licensing
4.1 SINUMERIK License Key
CompactFlash card as a spare part

If the CompactFlash card of a SINUMERIK controller is replaced, for example, because of
defective hardware, the license key loses its validity and the system is no longer operational.
In case of defective hardware of the CompactFlash card, contact the "Technical Support". They
will then send you a new license key without delay. The following data is required:
● Hardware serial number of the defective CompactFlash card
● Hardware serial number of the new CompactFlash card
Note
Only CompactFlash cards can be used that were released as spare part, as only these are
known to the license database.
Determining the hardware serial number

The hardware serial number is a permanent part of the CompactFlash card. It is used to identify
a control system uniquely. The hardware serial number can be determined by:
● Certificate of License (CoL)
● SINUMERIK user interface
● Label on the CompactFlash card
Note
Hardware serial number and CoL
The hardware serial number is located only on a CoL of the system software or if the license
was ordered bundled, in other words the system software came together with options.

Licensing
4.2 Web License Manager
4.2 Web License Manager
Overview
The use of the installed system software and the options activated on a SINUMERIK control
system require that the licenses purchased for this purpose are assigned to the hardware. In
the course of this assignment, a license key is generated from the license numbers of the
system software, the options, as well as the hardware serial number. Here, a license database
administered by Siemens is accessed via the Internet. Finally, the license information including
the license key is transferred to the hardware.
The license database can be accessed using the Web License Manager.
Web License Manager

By using the Web License Manager, you can assign licenses to the hardware in a standard Web
browser. To conclude the assignment, the license key must be entered at the controller via the
user interface.
Internet links
Web License Manager (http://www.siemens.com/automation/license)
Siemens Industry Mall (http://mall.automation.siemens.com)

Licensing
4.3 License database
4.3 License database
License database access

The license database contains all relevant license information required for the license
management of SINUMERIK software products. The central management of the license
information in the license database ensures that the existing license information regarding a
piece of hardware is always up to date.
Direct access
The direct access in the Web License Manager is made with:
● License number
● Delivery note number
The direct access enables the direct assignment of licenses for which the license numbers are
available, e.g. in the form of a CoL.
Direct access with barcode scanner

The direct access in the Web License Manager is made with:
● Product selection
The direct access enables the assignment of licenses with a barcode scanner for which the
license numbers are available as a barcode, for example in the form of a CoL.
Customer login
The customer login in the Web License Manager is made with:
● User name
● Password
The customer login enables the assignment of all the licenses available to the machine
manufacturer that are delivered at the time of the login and have not yet been assigned to any
machine. Here, the license numbers of licenses that can still be assigned need not be directly
at hand, instead these are displayed from within the license database.
Note
Obtaining access data
You can obtain the address data for the customer login from the Siemens Industry Mall under
the associated selected region with: "> Register" (top).

Licensing
4.4 How to perform the assignment
4.4 How to perform the assignment
Assigning a license to a piece of hardware

1. Determine the hardware serial number and the product name ("type of hardware") on the
user interface via the licensing dialog:
Commissioning > menu forward key > Licenses > Overview operating area
Note
Ensure that the hardware serial number displayed is also really the one you want to make
the assignment for. The assignment of a license to a piece of hardware cannot be reversed
via the Web License Manager.
2. Go to the Internet page of the Web License Manager.

3. Click the appropriate access to the license database:
– Direct access
– Direct access (barcode scanner )
– Customer login
4. Follow the instructions in the Web License Manager.
A progress bar shows you the individual steps:
5. Check the details of the selected licenses before confirmation of the assignment process.
Note
After confirmation, the generated license key irrevocably links the selected licenses with the
specified hardware.
6. Confirm the assignment process.

7. After completing the assignment process, enter the license key displayed on the Web
License Manager into the license dialog of the user interface.
Commissioning > menu forward key > Licenses > Overview operating area
8. Press the <INPUT> button to confirm the input of the new license key.
Displaying the license key and sending via e-mail

For archiving or for documentation of the associated machine, you can also send a license
report with the grouping of all assigned licenses. Follow the instructions in the Web License
Manager under "Display License Key".

Licensing
4.5 Important licensing terms
Certificate of License (CoL)

The CoL is the proof of the → license. The product may only be used by the holder of the
→ license or authorized persons. The CoL includes the following data relevant for the license
management:
● Product name
● License number
● Delivery note number
CompactFlash card
As the carrier of all non-volatile data in a SINUMERIK solution line control system, the
CompactFlash card represents the identity of this control system. The CompactFlash card is a
memory card that can be plugged into the → Control Unit from outside. The CompactFlash card
also contains the following data relevant for the license management:
● License information including the → license key
Hardware
In the context of license management of SINUMERIK → software products, hardware refers to
the component of a SINUMERIK control system to which → licenses are assigned on the basis
of its unique identifier. The license information is also saved to non-volatile memory on this
component, e.g. on a → CompactFlash card.
Hardware serial number

The hardware serial number is a permanent part of the → CompactFlash card. It is used to
identify a control system uniquely. The hardware serial number can be determined by:
● → Certificate of License
● User interface
● Label on the CompactFlash card
License
A license gives the user the legal right to use a → software product. Evidence of this right is
provided by the following:
● → Certificate of License (CoL)
● → License key

Licensing
License key
The License Key is the "technical representative" of the sum of all the → licenses that are
assigned to one particular piece of → hardware, which is uniquely identified by its → hardware
serial number.
License number
The license number is the feature of a → license used for its unique identification.
Option
An option is a SINUMERIK → software product that is not contained in the basic version and
which requires the purchase of a → license for its use.
Product
A product is marked by the data below within the license management of SINUMERIK
→ software products:
● Product designation
● Article number
● License number
Software product
The term software product is generally used to describe a product that is installed on a piece
of → hardware to process data. Within the license management of SINUMERIK software
products, a corresponding → license is required to use each software product.

Licensing

PLC commissioning 5
5.1 Connect PG/PC with the PLC
Introduction
SIMATIC Manager is a GUI for online/offline editing of S7 objects (projects, user programs,
blocks, hardware stations and tools).
You can perform the following actions with the SIMATIC Manager:
● Manage projects and libraries
● Call STEP 7 tools
● Establish an online connection to the PLC
A corresponding editing tool is started up when you open the relevant objects. The program
editor starts by double-clicking a program block. The block can be processed.
Starting SIMATIC Manager

After installation, the SIMATIC Manager icon appears on the Windows desktop, and in the Start
menu a "SIMATIC Manager" program item appears under "SIMATIC".
● Start the SIMATIC Manager by double-clicking the link on the Windows desktop or from the
Start menu.
● The online help for the active window is always called by pressing the <F1> function key.
Establishing communication with the PLC

To load the configuration into the PLC, the connection (Ethernet) from the PG/PC to the PLC
required for the loading must be ensured.
Procedure:
1. Select menu command: "Extras" > "Set PG/PC interface..."
2. Under the "Access mode" tab, look for the interface used in the "Interface parameterization
used" selection field, for instance: "TCP/IP → Realtek RTL8139/810x F…"
3. Confirm the parameterization with "OK".
Note
Parameterization of the PG/PC interface can be performed or changed from the SIMATIC
Manager at any time.

PLC commissioning
5.2 Creating a SIMATIC S7 project (PROFIBUS)
5.2.1 SIMATIC S7 project overview
Steps to be taken
A SIMATIC S7 project must be created for the basic commissioning of the PLC, the Ethernet
and PROFIBUS communication as well as the input/output data areas of the NC. To do this,
perform the following steps:
● Create a project
● Insert a SIMATIC station 300
● Insert an NCU to the hardware configuration
● Configuring interfaces
● Insert the machine control panel and handwheel
What do you need to be aware of?

Loading the PLC via interface X130 is also possible if the IP address of the Ethernet interface
is known. Loading an archive may always be performed if the communication HMI↔NC is
available.
Note
Loading the PLC (CP840) is essential for the configuration of the data path for saving/restoring
the drive data.
References
The PLC interface signals are described in the SINUMERIK 840D sl NC Variables and Interface
Signals (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763239)list manual.
Operating sequence
You have started the SIMATIC Manager.
1. To create a new project, select the "File" → "New" menu command in the SIMATIC Manager.
2. Enter the project data:
– Name (for example: SINU_840Dsl)
– Storage location (path)
– Type
3. Confirm the dialog with "OK".
The project window is displayed showing an empty S7 project structure.

PLC commissioning
5.2.2 Inserting SINUMERIK NCU to the HW Config
Overview
Insert the necessary hardware in the following order in the S7 project:
● Insert a SIMATIC station 300
● Start the hardware configuration
● Insert a SINUMERIK NCU
Operating sequence
Procedure:
1. Select via the context menu (right-click) "Insert new object" > "SIMATIC 300 station".
2. Double-click the <SIMATIC 300> symbol.

PLC commissioning
3. Double-click the <Hardware> symbol.

The HW Config for introducing required hardware is started.
4. In the menu, select "View" > "Catalog". The catalog with the modules is displayed.
① Station window:
② Details
③ Hardware catalog
The user interface of the "HW Config" hardware configuration shows the following details:
– Station window:
The station window is split. The upper part displays the structure of the station
graphically, and the lower part provides a detailed view of the selected module.
– Hardware catalog
This catalog also contains the SINUMERIK NCU that you need for configuring the
hardware.

PLC commissioning
Inserting a SINUMERIK NCU

With the operating sequence described below, you insert the NCU 720.3 PN as example:
1. Select "View" > "Catalog".
2. Search for the module in the catalog under "SIMATIC 300" → "SINUMERIK" → "840D sl" >
"NCU 720.3 PN".
3. Select "NCU 720.3 PN" with the left mouse button and drag it to the "Station design" station
window while keeping the mouse button pressed.
After you release the mouse button, into the dialog, configure the properties of the interfaces of
the communication processor CP provided on the NCU.

PLC commissioning
5.2.3 Configuring interfaces
Introduction
Configure the following interfaces in the STEP 7 project via which you want to access the NCU:
● Integrated PROFIBUS
● PROFIBUS DP, only with machine control panel for PROFIBUS (Page 60)
● Industrial Ethernet
When creating a new project using the catalog, the configuration of the PROFIBUS interface is
called automatically.
PROFIBUS DP operating sequence

1. Left-click to select an NCU and while holding down the mouse button drag it to the "Station
design" station window.
2. After you release the mouse button, configure the properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface
for socket X126 (machine control panel) in the dialog box.
3. No configuration is necessary for an Ethernet machine control panel: Select "Cancel".

PLC commissioning
4. The NCU module with SINAMICS S120 is inserted into the HW Config.
Note
With the <F4> key and confirmation of the prompt regarding "Reorganization", you can
reorganize the display in the station window.
5. Confirm with "OK".

Next, specify the properties for the Ethernet interface.
Operating sequence for Ethernet interface
Note
Use service interface X127 when commissioning the PLC. The Ethernet interface does not
have to be configured. This interface is already initialized with the IP address 192.168.215.1

PLC commissioning
For the initial commissioning with a PG/PC, it is necessary to configure an Ethernet interface.
In our example, this involves the interface to socket X120.
1. Double-click "CP 840D sl" in the basic rack of the NCU. The "Properties - CP 840D sl" dialog
opens.
2. After clicking the "Properties" button, a new Ethernet interface can be created.
3. For socket X120, enter the IP address "192.168.214.1" and the Subnet screen form
"255.255.255.0".
4. Create the Ethernet interface using "New" and then "OK".
5. Click "OK" twice.

PLC commissioning
Setting the isochronous mode on the PROFIBUS DP

Procedure for configuring the PROFIBUS DP interface in the STEP 7 project:
1. Left-click to select an NCU, and while holding down the mouse button drag it to the "Station
design" station window.
2. After you release the mouse button, configure the properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface
for socket X126 (machine control panel) in the dialog box.
3. Click "New…" and then the "Net settings" tab in the "New PROFIBUS subnet properties"
dialog.
4. Select the transmission rate of "12 Mbit/s" for the "DP" profile.

PLC commissioning
5. Click "Options" and then the "Isochronous mode" tab.
6. To enable reproducible access to peripherals (for handwheel mode), the PROFIBUS DP

must have a constant bus cycle time. The following entries are necessary under
Isochronous mode:
– Click the "Activate isochronous bus cycle" field.
– Enter the cycle, e.g. "2 ms" for the "Equidistant DP cycle" for the integrated PROFIBUS
(also see: MD10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME).
– Click the "Times Ti and To equal for all slaves" field.
– The fields "Time Ti" and "Time To" must contain a value "< 2 ms".

PLC commissioning
7. Click "OK" three times.

8. The NCU module with SINAMICS S120 is inserted in the HW Config.
Note
With the <F4> key and confirmation of the prompt regarding "Reorganization", you can
reorganize the display in the station window.
As the next step configure a machine control panel with handwheel.

PLC commissioning
5.2.4 Augmenting the machine control panel and handwheel in the HW configuration
Sequence and requirements

Configuring sequence for a PROFIBUS machine control panel:
1. Configuring the properties of the PROFIBUS DP interface.
2. Augment the machine control panel and handwheel in HW Config.
3. Modify the machine control panel in the OB100.
If a handwheel has been configured, isochronous mode on the PROFIBUS is required. The
PROFIBUS address for the machine control panel is "6". To expand the machine control panel,
you need the device master data (GSD file) with the SINUMERIK machine controlled panel.
This file is part of the STEP 7 package in the toolbox and contains information that a DP master
system requires to link the MCP as DP slave in its PROFIBUS configuration.
Procedure for the installation:
1. Search in the HW Config under "Tools" > "Install GSD file…" in the installation directory of
the toolbox for the corresponding GSD directory under:
..\8x0d\GSD\MCP_310_483
2. Choose the corresponding language you want to install.
3. Select "Install".
4. Exit with "Close".
Augmenting the machine control panel in HW Config

You have created an NCU and an NX in the HW Config and installed the GSD file for the MCP.
Procedure:
1. Search under "PROFIBUS DP" → "Further field devices" → "NC/RC" → "MOTION
CONTROL" in the hardware catalog for the "SINUMERIK MCP" module.
2. Left-click to select the "SINUMERIK MCP" module and drag it to the chain for the
"PROFIBUS DP master system" in the "Station design" station window.
3. After releasing the mouse key, you have inserted the machine control panel.
4. Select the "MCP" and enter the PROFIBUS address 6 under "Object properties" →
"PROFIBUS..." button → "Parameter" tab → "Address" input field.

PLC commissioning
5. Click "OK" twice. You can now assign the slots of the machine control panel with e.g.
"Standard + handwheel".
6. In the hardware catalog, select "SINUMERIK MCP" → "Standard+Handwheel" and drag it to

slot 1.
In the next step, configure the Web browser. Then save, compile and load the configuration to
the PLC.

PLC commissioning
5.2.5 Modifying PROFIBUS machine control panel in OB100
Configuring the machine control panel

The PLC base program transfers the signals from the machine control panel. To ensure that the
signals are transferred correctly to and from the machine control panel, enter the following
parameters in the OB100 on the FB1. Under "Blocks", double-click OB100 to open the editor
to configure the machine control panel .
Example: MCP1 is connected via PROFIBUS DP.
OB100
CALL "RUN_UP" , "gp_par" FB1 / DB7 -- Startup Baseprogram/ Parameters for Base-
program
MCPNum :=1 // An MCP is present
MCP1In :=P#E 0.0
MCP1Out :=P#A 0.0
MCP1StatSend :=P#A 8.0
MCP1StatRec :=
MCP1BusAdr :=6 // PROFIBUS DP address: 6
MCP1Timeout :=
MCP1Cycl :=
MCP2In :=
MCP2Out :=
MCP2StatSend :=
MCP2StatRec :=
MCP2BusAdr :=
MCP2Timeout :=
MCP2Cycl :=
MCPMPI :=FALSE
MCP1Stop :=FALSE
MCP2Stop :=
MCP1NotSend :=FALSE
MCP2NotSend :=
MCPSDB210 :=
MCPCopyDB77 :=
MCPBusType :=B#16#03 // Parameter [3] := PROFIBUS DP

PLC commissioning
OB100
BHG :=
BHGIn :=
BHGOut :=
...
UDInt :=
UDHex :=
UDReal :=
IdentMcpType :=
IdentMcpLengthIn :=
IdentMcpLengthOut:=
//Insert User program from here
...
An example for the connection via Industrial Ethernet (IE) can be found at: Modifying machine
control panel in OB100 (Page 85)
References
Further information can be found in the "Structure and functions of the base program" section
of the Basic Functions (P3) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763231)
Function Manual.

PLC commissioning
5.2.6 Configuring the Web server
Operating sequence
1. Click the SINUMERIK module in the hardware configuration to open the following dialog.
2. Select the "Web" tab.

3. Activate the option: "Activate the Web server on this module".
After loading the configuration data, the Web server of the CPU is started to read information
from the PLC.
4. Select the language for language-dependent texts to be loaded into the CPU.
The number of available languages is CPU-dependent. Examples of language-dependent
texts are diagnostics buffer entries or messages.
Note
Available languages
The languages you select here must be installed in the S7 project. You can install the
languages for the project in the SIMATIC Manager from "Extras" → "Language for display
devices ... "
If the languages you select in the SIMATIC Manager have not been installed previously, the
Web server can only display texts in the set default language.
5. Activate the "Automatic update" if you want the Web pages to be updated automatically. The
"Identification" Web page is excluded from the automatic update.
Telegram lengths and I/O addresses

The telegram lengths and I/O addresses for communication between the PLC and the drive
(can be viewed via the object properties of the integrated SINAMICS) have already been pre-
assigned correctly and do not need to be configured.

PLC commissioning
5.2.7 Inserting an NX to the hardware configuration
Introduction
The NX must be wired to the NCU via the DRIVE-CLiQ. A DRIVE-CLiQ socket is permanently
preassigned for each address. The following table shows the wiring:
DRIVE-CLiQ interface of the NCU Address on the integrated PROFIBUS

X100 10
X101 11
X102 12
X103 13
X104 *) 14
X105 *) 15
*)
Not available on the NCU 710.3B PN.
Operating sequence
An NX component is contained in the example configuration, for the axis to control the spindle.
This component must be integrated in the hardware configuration also when creating the STEP
7 project:
1. Search for the NX module NX15.3 in the hardware catalog under
"PROFIBUS DP" > "SINAMICS" > "SINUMERIK NX…".
2. Left-click to select the "SINUMERIK NX ..." module and drag it to the "PROFIBUS Integrated
DP master system" bus in the "Station design" station window.
3. The "DP Slave Properties" dialog box opens.
Enter the address for the integrated PROFIBUS in this dialog. "15" is proposed for the first
NX in a configuration.

PLC commissioning
4. Enter the address and click "OK".
5. Confirm the wiring notification with "OK".

6. After releasing the mouse key, you have inserted the NX module:

PLC commissioning
When deleting and reinserting NX modules, while configuring, a new address area is assigned
each time. We recommend that addresses are assigned as follows in order to create a
transparent configuration:
DRIVE-CLiQ interface Address on the integra‐ Start address of the first Start address of the last
ted PROFIBUS slot slot
X100 10 5540 5740
X101 11 5300 5500
X102 12 5060 5260
X103 13 4820 5020
X104 14 4580 4780
X105 15 4340 4540
5.2.8 End the hardware configuration and load it to the PLC
End the hardware configuration and load the to the PLC

The project must be saved and compiled to exit the overall configuration and generate the
system data for the PLC:
1. Select the "Station" → "Save and compile" menu.
2. Click the "Load in module" button to load the configuration to the PLC.
The "Select target module" dialog automatically displays both configured communication
partners.
3. Confirm with OK to load into these two modules.

4. Confirm the dialog boxes displayed subsequently with "OK" or "No" for the query "…Should
the module be started now (restart)?".
Note
Check the communication interface under "Target system" → "Diagnostics" → "Operating
state".
5. Close the "HW Config" window.

The next step is to create the PLC program.

PLC commissioning
5.3 Extending the SIMATIC S7 project (PROFINET)
5.3.1 Requirements when configuring PROFINET
PROFINET IO IRT (Isochronous Real Time)

I/O modules and drives can use the isochronous PROFINET IO IRT. In addition to IRT, an RT
communication is also possible by default.
PROFINET IO IRT can be used by the PLC as PLC I/O and also by the NC. Drives are typically,
but not exclusively, configured as isochronous devices for use by the NC. The PROFINET IO
IRT devices operated isochronously by the PLC are typically I/O stations.
The concurrent operation of IRT "high performance" and CBA on the same PROFINET bus
interface is not supported. This means either NC drives via PROFINET IO with IRT or system
coupling via PROFINET CBA can be operated on an NCU.
The combination of isochronous PROFINET NC peripherals (drives, inputs/outputs) and NCU-
LINK is not supported.

PLC commissioning
Settings for isochronous operation

NC-controlled drives connected via PROFINET must be operated isochronously with the same
cycle clocks (Tdp, Ti and To) as the drives, which are connected via the integrated PROFIBUS.
The cycle clock settings are made in STEP 7 (HW Config). For a SINUMERIK, times Ti and To
must match in the complete system.
,VRFKURQRXVDODUP1&.RIWKH3/&31'3
)L[HGPXVWEHVHOHFWHG
KHUH
&ORFNF\FOHVHWWLQJRIWKH6,1$0,&6LQWHJUDWHGRIWKH1&8
PDWFKLQJYDOXHVIRU7LDQG
7R

PLC commissioning
6HWWLQJRIWKHLVRFKURQRXV352),1(7,2GHYLFH
2QO\1&.KDVWREHVHOHFWHG
LQWKH,2GHYLFHYDOXHV7LDQG
7RDUHDXWRPDWLFDOO\WDNHQ
IURPWKHV\QFKURQRXVPDVWHU
5.3.2 Sample configuration
Configuration via PROFINET

The SINAMICS S120 drives communicate via PROFINET interfaces X150 P1 and X150 P2
with the NCU. The drives assigned to the SINAMICS CU3x0-2 can be operated NC-controlled
or PLC-controlled. Mixed operation is also permitted. Requirement is that the drives are
connected via PROFINET, with an additional switch between X120 and X150 of the NCU.
● CU310-2 PN
● CU320-2 PN (also with Communication Board CBE20)
● CU320-2 DP with Communication Board CBE20
● Scalance X208 (recommended)

PLC commissioning
Sample configuration

+7 3&8
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
6ZLWFK
; 352),%1(7
;
; '5,9(&/L4
6,180(5,.'VO 1;
ZLWK6,1$0,&66
&831 •••
3RZHUVXSSO\
6,1$0,&66
6HUYRPRWRUV 0DLQVSLQGOHPRWRU
Figure 5-1 Configuration with three NC-controlled axes
Communication with the drive

For instance, to establish a network connection from the plant/system network (X120) to the
drive network (X150), we recommend that an alias IP address is allocated. In the operating
area, select "Commissioning" → "Network" → "Overview". Press the "Change" softkey, and
enter an alias address for X120 of the following type:
The SINUMERIK Operate Online Help provides more detailed, context-related infor‐
mation on the network settings.

PLC commissioning
5.3.3 Commissioning the PLC
Basic procedure
Perform the following steps:
● Insert the SINAMICS Control Unit in HW Config.
● Set the sync master and sync slaves.
● Configure the PROFINET interface.
● Configure the isochronous alarms.
● Save the configuration, compile and then download to the PLC.
● Establish the online connection to the target system and assign a device name to the
SINAMICS Control Unit.
Configuring a PROFINET connection

Procedure:
1. At the SINUMERIK NCU, select X150 and insert a PROFINET line via the "Insert" →
"PROFINET IO system" menu. Click the "New" button to insert a new subnet "Ethernet(1)":
2. Navigate in the catalog to "PROFINET IO" → "Drives" → "SINAMICS" → "SINAMICS S120"

→ "SINAMICS S120 CU320-2 PN".

PLC commissioning
3. Keeping the left mouse key pressed, drag the object under "S120 CU320-2 PN" in the
station window to the PROFINET IO system.
4. By double-clicking on the SINAMICS Control Unit, you open the "Properties" dialog box to
enter a device name.
Note
Device name for SINAMICS S120
Ensure that you use a meaningful name as device name for the SINAMICS Control Unit.
5. In this dialog box, you also activate the topology-based device initialization by selecting the
option "Assign IP address by I/O controller". See also: Complete the PLC project (Page 78)
7. In the next step, you configure the required number of axes, the same as in the configuration
example in the previous chapter:
Three servo DOs, a Control Unit and an infeed with the telegrams recommended for
SINUMERIK.

PLC commissioning
8. Drag the drive objects and drop them into the SINAMICS Control Unit.
The following sequence must be observed:

1. Number of SERVO DO for the axes
2. SINAMICS Control Unit
3. Infeed (optional)
To do this, the following telegrams are recommended:
– SIEMENS telegram 136, PZD-15/19 for a servo DO for an NC-controlled axis.
– SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2 for the Control Unit:
Telegram 390 is required for the time synchronization between the drive and the control
system. The time stamps of the drive alarms can then be compared to those of the
control system.
– SIEMENS telegram 370, PZD-1/1 for the infeed (ALM), if available.
9. In the SINUMERIK NCU, select "Port 1" at the X150 P1 interface and open the "Properties"
dialog with a double-click.

PLC commissioning
10.Select the "Topology" tab to assign the "partner port" to X150 P1 and click "OK" to confirm.
Note for the selection of the cable length that a longer cable length also increases the signal
runtime.
11.Select interface X150 in the SINUMERIK NCU and from the shortcut menu "PROFINET IO
Domain Management...".
12.In the list under "Station/device name", select the SINUMERIK NCU and with a double-click,
open the synchronization dialog in order to define the NCU as "Sync master".

PLC commissioning
13.In the list under "Station/device name", select the SINAMICS Control Unit and with a double-
click, open the synchronization dialog in order to define the SINAMICS Control Unit as "Sync
slave".
14.The "Send clock [ms]" text box can then be edited. Here, select the same time as has been
set for SINAMICS Integrated of the NCU (DP cycle), for example 2 ms. Confirm with "OK".
15.Select the PLC in the SINUMERIK NCU and open the "Properties" dialog with a double-click.

PLC commissioning
16.Select the "Clock synchronous alarms" tab and assign the PROFINET IO system number to
the "NCK" line to which you have added the SINAMICS Control Unit.
17.Double-click the "Details" button to open the "NCK" dialog:

Here, enter "2" for the subprocess image and confirm with "OK". For the "Ti/To mode", select
the option "Fixed". The project is then saved and compiled.
Configuring SINAMICS CU320

Procedure:
1. Select interface X150 in the SINAMICS Control Unit.
2. Open the "Properties" dialog and select the "IO cycle" tab.
3. Under "Isochronous Mode", for the option "Assign IO device ...", select → "NCK".

PLC commissioning

5. The following message is output regarding isochronous mode, which you must confirm with
"Yes":
5.3.4 Configuring PROFIsafe
Requirement
In order to configure PROFIsafe, it is necessary that the "S7 configurations pack" option is
installed.

PLC commissioning
Configuring PROFIsafe
Procedure:
1. In the hardware catalog, under "DO SERVO", select PROFIsafe telegram 30, and insert it
in the project for the axis for which you wish to configure PROFIsafe.
2. Open properties with a double-click, and enter the start address:
PROFIsafe telegrams must be in the process image with their I/O addresses and must not
be assigned to the isochronous process image partition PIP (1 for PLC, 2 for NC).
Result of the PROFIsafe configuring:
Figure 5-2 Configuring with PROFIsafe (excerpt)

PLC commissioning
Note
Telegram 701
If further Safety Integrated functions are to be configured for an axis, telegram 701 is also
required. The configuration procedure is the same as for telegram 30.
The functions available for SINUMERIK are described in the Safety Integrated Function
Manual.
5.3.5 Complete the PLC project
Complete the PLC project

Procedure:
2. Click the "Load to module" button to load the configuration to the PLC: End the hardware
configuration and load it to the PLC (Page 87).
Topology-based device initialization

The topology-based device initialization is activated by selecting the option "Assign IP address
by I/O controller".

PLC commissioning
Note
Topology-based device initialization
If a topology was defined in HW Config of the S7 project for the complete PROFINET IO
system, then it is no longer necessary to assign the device name ("initialization") by STEP 7. As
a result of the defined topology, the PLC-CPU automatically identifies and "initializes" the
devices, the so-called topology-based device initialization.
Displaying the device name in SINUMERIK Operate
The assigned name is output in the "PROFINET diagnostics" window as device name in
SINUMERIK Operate.
PROFINET naming conventions

Device names are assigned to the PROFINET IO devices during the commissioning phase.
In order to communicate with PROFINET devices, they must be initialized (assigned a name).
This name is the device name within the hardware configuration. This name must comply with
the PROFINET naming conventions. The rules of the naming conventions are checked by the
hardware configuration and, if required, corrected. Invalid characters are replaced by "X". The
following supplementary conditions must be maintained:
● Maximum length of 127 characters (letters "a" to "z", numbers "0" to "9", hyphen or period).
● A name component within the device name, e.g. a string between two periods, must not
exceed 63 characters.
● No special characters such as umlauts, parentheses, underscores, slashes, blanks, etc. are
permitted.
● The hyphen is the only special character permitted.
● Upper-case letters must not be used in device names.
● The device name must not begin or end with the "-" or "." character.
● The device name must not begin with numbers.
● The device name must not take the form n.n.n.n (n = 0...999).
● The device name must not start with the character string "port-xyz-" (x,y,z = 0...9).
Specifying device names for SINAMICS CU

Alternative procedure:
To permit the SINAMICS CU to be recognized by the SINUMERIK NCU and the communication
via X150 to be established, a device name must be assigned in the PLC configuring of the
SINAMICS Control Unit.
1. Establish an online connection to the target system via X150 with the PG/PC.
2. Select the SINAMICS Control Unit in HW Config.
3. Select the "Target system" → "Ethernet >" → "Assign device name" menu.

PLC commissioning
4. Select the desired SINAMICS Control Unit from the list of the accessible nodes
(participants) and enter a name. Select LED flashing in order to identify the drive object.
5. To assign the name, confirm with "OK".
See also
The further procedure matches the configuring process via PROFIBUS:
● Creating a PLC program (Page 81)
● Checking the communication to the drive (Page 211)

PLC commissioning
5.4 Creating a PLC program
Introduction
The PLC program is constructed modularly. It comprises the following parts:
● PLC basic program
The PLC basic program organizes the exchange of signals and data between the PLC
program and the NC, HMI, and machine control panel components. The PLC basic program
is part of the SINUMERIK 840D sl Toolbox.
● PLC program (extension by the machine manufacturer)
The PLC program is the machine-specific part of the machine manufacturer by which the
PLC basic program is extended.
For example, the FB1 (boot block of the PLC basic program) must be supplied with
variables. A description of this can be found in:
Cyclic operation (OB1)

From a chronological viewpoint, the basic program runs before the PLC program. The NC/PLC
interface is completely processed in cyclic operation. Cyclic monitoring is activated between
PLC and NC once booting and the first OB1 cycle have been completed. A PLC failure
produces alarm "2000 Sign-of-life monitoring PLC".
References: Function Manual Basic Functions (P3) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763231)
PLC program
The entry points for machine-specific components of the PLC program are located in the
following PLC basic program blocks:
● OB100 (restart)
● OB1 (cyclic processing)
● OB40 (process alarm)

PLC commissioning
2% )%
3/&EDVLFSURJUDP
5HVWDUW
3/&SURJUDP
)%)%)%)%
2% )&
0&3VLJQDOV
3/&EDVLFSURJUDP +7VLJQDOV
)&)&)&
7RROPDQDJHPHQW )&
6SLQGOHFRQWURO
)&
&\FOLFSURFHV
VLQJ 6WDUW$68%
)%)%)%)%
3/&SURJUDP
9DULDEOHUZ3,
)& VHUYLFHV
6WDUGHOWD )&
'LVSOD\FRQWURO+7
)&
)DXOWDQGRSHUDWLRQDO
PHVVDJHV
2% )&
3/&EDVLFSURJUDP
3URFHVVDODUP
3/&SURJUDP
Figure 5-3 PLC program structure
PLC status
The PLC always starts up in RESTART mode, i.e. the PLC operating system runs OB100 after
initialization and starts cyclic operation at the beginning of OB1. No return is made to the
interruption point (for example, in the event of a power failure).
Start-up behavior of the PLC

There are both retentive and non-retentive areas for the markers, timers and counters. The
areas are continuous and are divided by a parameterizable limit, where the area with the higher-
value address range is defined as the non-retentive area. Data blocks are always retentive.
RESTART startup type (OB100)

If the retentive area is not buffered (the buffer battery is empty) start-up is prevented. The
following operations are performed during a restart:
● Delete the UStack, BStack and non-retentive flags, timers and counters
● Delete the process output image (POI)
● Cancel the process and diagnostics alarms

PLC commissioning
● Update the system status list

● Evaluate the parameterization objects of modules (as of SD100) and output the default
parameters to all modules
● Process restart OB (OB100)
● Read in the process input image (PII)
● Cancel command output inhibit (BASP)
5.4.1 Preconditions for creating the PLC program
Software and hardware requirements

The following preconditions apply when processing the PLC program:
● SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.5 SP4
● SIMATIC STEP 7 is installed on the PG/PC
● Installation of the SINUMERIK toolbox (PLC base program, slave OEM, GSD files)
● Edit the blocks in the PLC base program
● Installation of the PLC base program library
To be able to use the blocks of the PLC base ic program (OBs, FBs, DBs) in a SIMATIC S7
project, the library must first be installed in the SIMATIC Manager.
Editing the blocks in the PLC base program

The SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation describes how to modify and expand the PLC basic
program. The individual blocks in the basic PLC program can be processed in the SIMATIC
Manager:
● Select the appropriate block, e.g. OB100, in the blocks folder of the corresponding module
● Use the menu command "Edit" → "Open object" to open the block or double-click the block
with the left mouse button
● Processing modules in the LAD/STL/FBD editor
● Switching the block view using menu command - "View" → "LAD" or STL, FBD.
5.4.2 Insert PLC basic program
Introduction
You have performed the hardware configuration, have saved and compiled the project and
have created the system data for the PLC. You have installed the Toolbox software that also
contains the libraries for the PLC basic program of an NCU.

PLC commissioning
Operating sequence to open the library and copy sources, symbols and blocks
You are on the main screen of the SIMATIC Manager:
1. Select the "File" → "Open" menu and then click the "Libraries" tab.
2. Select the library of the PLC basic program, e.g. "bp7x0_45" and confirm the dialog with
"OK".
You have inserted the library and selected the PLC program from "SINU_840Dsl" >
"SINUMERIK" → "PLC 317 2DP" → "S7 program".
&RS\VRXUFHVEORFNVDQGV\PEROV
LQWRWKHIROGHUIRUWKH3/&SURJUDP
3. Copy the sources, modules and symbols to the PLC program.
Overwrite OB1
Inserting blocks overwrites the existing organization block OB1. Confirm the query as to
whether you want to overwrite the block with "Yes".
You have now created the PLC basic program.
In the next section you will modify some of the data for the machine control panel in OB100.

PLC commissioning
5.4.3 Modifying machine control panel in OB100
Introduction
The PLC base program transfers the signals from the machine control panel. To ensure that the
signals are transferred correctly to and from the machine control panel, enter the following
parameters in the OB100 on the FB1. Under "Blocks", double-click OB100 to open the editor
to configure the machine control panel .
Example: MCP1 is connected via Industrial Ethernet (IE).
Configuring the machine control panel

OB100
CALL "RUN_UP" , "gp_par" FB1 / DB7 -- Startup Baseprogram/ Parameters for Base-
program
MCPNum :=1 // An MCP is present
MCP1In :=P#E 0.0
MCP1Out :=P#A 0.0
MCP1StatSend :=P#A 8.0
MCP1StatRec :=
MCP1BusAdr :=192 // IP address: 192.168.214.192 - this ad-
MCP1Timeout := dress must also be set on the DIPFIX switch
of the MCP.
MCP1Cycl :=
MCP2In :=
MCP2Out :=
MCP2StatSend :=
MCP2StatRec :=
MCP2BusAdr :=
MCP2Timeout :=
MCP2Cycl :=
MCPMPI :=FALSE
MCP1Stop :=FALSE
MCP2Stop :=
MCP1NotSend :=FALSE
MCP2NotSend :=
MCPSDB210 :=
MCPCopyDB77 :=
MCPBusType :=B#16#05 // Parameter [5] := ETHERNET

PLC commissioning
OB100
BHG :=
BHGIn :=
BHGOut :=
...
UDInt :=
UDHex :=
UDReal :=
IdentMcpType :=
IdentMcpLengthIn :=
IdentMcpLengthOut:=
//Insert User program from here
...
Result
You have completed the configuration of the PLC base program. In the next step, you will load
the project to the PLC.
An example for the connection via PROFIBUS DP can be found at: Modifying PROFIBUS
machine control panel in OB100 (Page 60)
Machine control panel with handwheel

If you have an Ethernet machine control panel with Ethernet handwheel, you must set the
following machine data for the handwheel:
MD11350[0] $MN_HANDWHEEL_SEGMENT = 7Ethernet
The following are true for a PROFINET machine control panel with handwheel:
MD11350[0] = 5 PROFIBUS/PROFINET

PLC commissioning
5.5 Download the project to the PLC
Introduction
For loading the configured PLC project, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
Precondition
● An Ethernet network connection exists between STEP7 and the PLC.
● The configuration to be loaded corresponds to the actual station configuration.
● The NCU is active:
– NC is in cyclic mode.
– PLC in RUN or STOP mode.
Supplementary condition
The following supplementary conditions regarding the system data blocks must be observed
when the configuration is loaded:
● HW Config
When loading the configuration via HW Config, only the system modules and their
associated system data blocks selected in HW Config are loaded into the module. However,
global data defined in SDB 210 is not loaded from the HW Config, for example.
You have loaded the HW Config to the module in the previous "End the hardware
configuration and load to the PLC" chapter.
● SIMATIC Manager
When loading the configuration via the SIMATIC Manager all the system data blocks are
loaded into the module.
Note
When the PLC program is loaded in the "RUN" mode, each block loaded becomes active
immediately. This can result in inconsistencies when executing the active PLC program. It
is therefore advised to place the PLC in the "STOP" mode before loading the configuration,
if this has not already been done.

PLC commissioning
Operating sequence for loading system blocks into the module

1. To load the configuration of the system blocks change to the SIMATIC Manager.
2. In the SIMATIC Manager in the PLC directory, select the directory "Blocks" > right mouse
button > "Target system" > "Load" (see figure below), or the "Load" symbol.
Figure 5-4 Loading system blocks
3. If there is no connection to the target system, you must confirm in sequence the following
dialog requests with:
– "OK" for "Check the required sequence of blocks for correct functioning"
– "Yes" for "Do you want to load system data?"
– "Yes" for "Must system data be deleted on the module and replaced by off-line system
data?"
– "No" for "The module is in STOP mode. Do you want to start the module (cold restart)?"
You have loaded the PLC program to the PLC; the PLC is in "STOP" mode.
Note
If the PLC is stopped via the SIMATIC Manager, then it also has to be started via the
SIMATIC Manager. Starting via the PLC mode selector is also possible.

PLC commissioning
5.6 Loading PLC symbols to the controller
5.6 Loading PLC symbols to the controller
Requirements
You require the SIMATIC STEP 7 software and the "PLC Symbols Generator" program that is
provided in the toolbox.
For blocks that already have a symbolic name, these symbols cannot be overwritten by other
user-defined designations. Only those symbols are transferred from the blocks to the control
without preassigned symbols.
Generating PLC symbols

To edit PLC blocks via symbolic names, you can generate the symbols of the STEP 7 project
for SINUMERIK Operate and store them on the CompactFlash card on the control.
Procedure:
1. Open the "PLC Symbols Generator" program and navigate to the corresponding PLC
project.
2. To start the generation, first select the required language.
3. Save the "PlcSym.snh" and "PlcSym_xx.snt" files. xx is the language code specified when
creating the file. The generation is then started.
4. Create the following directory on the CompactFlash card and store the generated files
(PlcSym_xx.snt, PlcSym.snh) under the following path: /oem/sinumerik/plc/symbols
This path also applies for SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU 50.
5. After restarting SINUMERIK Operate, the symbol tables are loaded when booting. Select
the "Insert variables" softkey to display the imported symbols in the table of the "NC/PLC
variables".
Note
The notation (upper/lower case) of the file name that the program created is mandatory and
must not be changed.
Transmission log
For the generation and transmission of the symbols, a transmission log is created and stored
under the following path: ../log/symbolimport.log
Example:
...
Error importing PLC symbols: skip vdi on 840d: Symbol number 16956
...

PLC commissioning
5.7 First commissioning of the PLC completed
5.7 First commissioning of the PLC completed
First commissioning of the PLC completed

To synchronize the PLC and NC, an NC reset (po) is required.
The PLC and NC are in the following state after a reset (po):
● RUN LED is continuously lit green.
● Status display shows a "6" with a flashing dot.
⇒ PLC and NC are in cyclic operation.
You have completed the first commissioning of the PLC.
Continue with the steps for "Guided commissioning (Page 109)" of the SINAMICS drives.
You start with a reset (po) for the NC and drive system.
Note
Response of the PLC in the case of an NC stop
For a stop of the NC, the PLC normally continues to run and the type of stop response is the
user's responsibility depending on the machine situation. In this special case, the NC can no
longer switch the outputs to zero and the current status is retained because the PLC is still
running.
In order to switch off the outputs or to force a PLC stop, for example, the "NC READY" signal
is evaluated in the PLC program.

PLC commissioning
5.8 Configuring a network (NetPro) for PG/PC
5.8.1 Integrating PG/PC into NetPro
Requirements
The following requirements for integrating a PG/PC must be met:
● The NCU is integrated in the S7 project using HW Config (see: Inserting SINUMERIK NCU
to the HW Config (Page 49)).
● The properties of the interfaces are configured (see: Configuring interfaces (Page 52)).
● The machine control panel is inserted (see: Modifying machine control panel in OB100
(Page 85)).
● The configuration has been saved and compiled (see: End the hardware configuration and
load it to the PLC (Page 65)).
● A PLC program has been created.
Inserting PG/PC in the S7 project

To perform routing functions and permit the communication between PG/PC ↔ HMI via
Ethernet, a PG/PC must be included in the SIMATIC Manager under NetPro and the interfaces
configured.

PLC commissioning
Procedure:
1. To add a PG/PC, open the S7 project in the SIMATIC Manager.
2. In the menu, select "Extras" → "Configure net" or click the button.
3. Insert the PG/PC with drag&drop under "Stations" from the catalog into the network
configuration.
,QVHUW3*3&XVLQJ
'UDJ 'URS
The inserted "PG/PC" station does not yet contain any interfaces. These are configured in the
next step.
5.8.2 Configuration of the PG/PC interface
Introduction
Under NetPro, configure the interfaces required for commissioning on the PG/PC:
● PROFIBUS
● Industrial Ethernet
● PROFINET
● MPI

PLC commissioning
Configuring interfaces on the PG/PC

Procedure:
1. Mark the symbol "PG/PC" under NetPro.
2. Select "Object properties" <right-click>.
3. In the displayed "Properties - PG/PC" dialog, select the "Interfaces" tab to configure the
required interfaces.
Example: Configuring Industrial Ethernet

Procedure:
1. Click "New…" to first configure the Ethernet interface.
2. In the selection field, select "Industrial Ethernet".
3. Click "OK".

PLC commissioning
4. Select the subnet "Ethernet(1)" and enter the following IP address and subnet mask for the
PG/PC:
– IP address 192.168.215.2
– Subnet mask 255.255.255.224
5. Deactivate the option "Set MAC address/Use ISO protocol" and confirm with "OK".
6. You can configure additional interfaces via "New".
All configured interfaces can then be viewed under the "Interface" tab:
The configured interfaces must be assigned in a device-specific manner to the available

hardware interfaces on the PG/PC. The sequence steps are laid out in the following section.

PLC commissioning
5.8.3 Assigning interfaces
Introduction
The interfaces configured in the previous chapter must now be assigned in a device-specific
manner to the available hardware interfaces on the PG/PC.
Operating sequence for assigning an Ethernet interface

1. Select the "Assign" tab.
2. Select "Ethernet interface(1)" in the selection field "Configured interfaces".
3. Select in the "Interface parameter assignments in the PG/PC" selection field, the "TCP/IP -
> Realtek RTL8139/810xF…" network card installed on the PG/PC.
4. To transfer the interfaces from the "Not assigned" area to the "Assigned" area and activate
them, click "Assign" and confirm the subsequent prompt on editing the object properties with
"OK".

PLC commissioning
5. Now assign the remaining configured PROFIBUS interfaces. From those interfaces
assigned, one must be marked as "active".
6. Select "Ethernet interface" in the "Assigned" field and mark the field next to it as "active".
7. Click "OK" to end the "Properties - PG/PC" dialog.
In NetPro, the PG/PC interface declared as "active" has a yellow background.
8. Select "Save and compile → Save and check all" and confirm the process with "OK".
The next described operating sequence explains how to load this hardware configuration to the
NCU.
5.8.4 Loading the HW config to NCU
Introduction
The newly created network configuration PG/PC must be introduced to the NCU.
You have established a connection to the Ethernet interface (X120 or X127) and you now load
this configuration from the PG/PC to the NCU.

PLC commissioning
Operating sequence for loading HW config to the NCU

1. Change from "NetPro" to "HW Config".
2. Click the "Download to module" button.
The two communication partners are automatically marked in the "Select target module"
dialog
3. Confirm the load into the module with "OK".
4. Confirm the following dialog boxes initially with "OK" and then "No" for the query "… Should
the module be started now (restart)?".
Note
Loading the HW config to the NCU is only possible via the Ethernet interface.

PLC commissioning

Commissioning NC-controlled drives 6
6.1 Configuration examples
6.1.1 Example: Configuration of the drive components
Configuration overview
The commissioning described in this manual is orientated on the following example
configuration of the SINAMICS drive line-up.
● Infeed (Active Line Module)
● NCU 720.3 PN with:
– A Double Motor Module for two motors each with an SMC20 (Sensor Module Cabinet).
– A Single Motor Module for a motor with two SMC20s for the encoders.
● NX 15.3 with:
– A Single Motor Module for a motor with SMI (Sensor Module Integrated)

Commissioning NC-controlled drives
; ;
;
; ;
; 60& 60&
'5,9(&/L4
60&
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
60&
1;
1&8 $FWLYH/LQH 'RXEOH0RWRU 6LQJOH0RWRU 6LQJOH0RWRU
0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH 0RGXOH
'ULYHREMHFW
IRUWKH1;
'ULYHREMHFWV
IRUWKH1&8
=
<
6SLQGOH
Figure 6-1 SINAMICS S120 example configuration
References
Additional DRIVE-CLiQ components of the SINAMICS drive line-up can be found in:
SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual /GH2/ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109763282)

6.1.2 Example: Parallel connection with TM120
Topology
Application: Four motors connected in parallel
70 60[
;
; ;
$/0 600
[WHPSHUDWXUHLQSXW
; ;
6,180(5,.
; ;
FRQWUROV\VWHP )XUWKHU600RU'00
; ;
; 70
; ;
00
; ;
[WHPSHUDWXUHLQSXW
M1 ... M4 Motor 1 ... motor 4

One KTY and three PTC in series are connected for each motor.
SMx Sensor Module (motor encoder)
ALM Active Line Module
DMM Double Motor Module
SMM Single Motor Module
TM120 Terminal Module
The shown topology requires four KTY sensors and four PTC sensors:
● Each primary section has one KTY sensor (Temp-F) and three series-connected PTC
sensors (Temp-S).
Two TM120s are required:
● A TM120 is interconnected automatically in series between the Motor Module and the SMx
Sensor Module.
● A TM120 is directly inserted into a Line Module: This requires a manual interconnection by
the commissioning engineer.

Actions
Depending on the topology, the following actions must be performed on the TM120:
1. TM120 between the Motor Module and the SMx Sensor Module
This TM120 evaluates four KTYs => sensor types must be selected by Servo-p4610/TM-
p4100. The associated temperature is output by servo-r4620/TM120-r4105.
2. TM120 directly on the Line Module
This TM120 evaluates four PTCs => sensor types must be selected by TM-p4100. The
associated temperature is output by servo-r4105.
Setting the threshold values in the PTC context:
– TM120-p4102[x]=251 => evaluation Off
– TM120-p4102[x]=120 => evaluation On
Assignment of the TM120 response using fault propagation on the drive => setting of the
propagation by servo-p0609=BICO:<object number>TM120:4105.0
Assignment of the alarms to the motor

The occurring error messages are assigned to the motors as follows:
● Temperature channel on the TM120 in series connection with Motor Modules and encoders:
Alarm 207015 <location>drive: Motor temperature sensor warning
Alarm 207016 <location>drive: Motor temperature sensor fault
Alarm 235920 <location>TM: Temperature sensor channel 0 error
In this case, the output message with reference to the motor and to the temperature
component shows the relevant motor.
● Temperature channel on the TM120 directly to the Line Module:
Alarm 235207 <location>TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 0 exceeded
Special feature with PTC:
TM120-r4105 = -50 temperature is below the nominal response temperature
TM120-r4105 = 250 temperature is above the nominal response temperature
In this case, a message is output only with reference to the temperature component.
The affected motor can be determined from the information concerning the TM120.

6.2 Terminal assignment
6.2.1 NCU terminal assignment

With the drive device configuration, the following terminals are pre-assigned on the NCU:
● X122
● X132
● X142
; ; ;

The terminal assignments for terminal strips X122, X132, X142 are listed in the following tables.
6.2.2 X122 terminal assignment
Terminal Signal name Function Pre-assign‐

ment
X122.1 DI 0 Input ON/OFF1 infeed (if one infeed with a DRIVE-CLiQ x
connection is operated at the NCU)
X122.2 DI 1 Input 2. Operating condition OFF3 drives x
"OFF3 rapid stop"
Braking with a configurable OFF3 ramp (p1135, p1136,
p1137); thereafter, pulse suppression and switching on
inhibited. The drive stops controlled. The braking re‐
sponse can be set separately for each SERVO.
X122.3 DI 2 Selection safe standstill group 1 ---
SH/SBC - Group 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH =
p9601 release)
X122.4 DI 3 Selection safe standstill group 2 ---
SH/SBC - Group 2 SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH =
p9601 release)


ment
X122.5 DI16 Freely available ---
X122.7 Ground for terminals 1...6
X122.8 Ground for terminals 9, 10, 12, 13
X122.9 DI/DO 8 Status safe standstill group 1 ---
SH/SBC - Group 1
SINAMICS Safety Integrated
X122.10 DI/DO 9 Status safe standstill group 2 ---
SH/SBC - Group 2
X122.11 Ground for terminals 9, 10, 12, 13 ---
X122.12 DI/DO 10 Input, external zero mark - BERO 1 ---
X122.13 DI/DO 11 Input probe 1 - central measurement x
(Check that MD13210 = 0)
Input probe 1 - distributed measurement ---
(Check that MD13210 = 1)
In the "pre-assignment" column, the signals for which the associated SINAMICS parameters are set when
configuring a SINAMICS device are marked with "x".

ment
X132.1 DI 4 Freely available ---
X132.4 DI 7 Infeed line contactor feedback signal (if one infeed is ---
operated with a DRIVE-CLiQ connection at the NCU)
X132.7 Ground for terminals 1...6
X132.9 DI/DO 12 Output: Infeed operation (if one infeed is operated with x
a DRIVE-CLiQ connection at the NCU)
Input 2. Operating condition OFF2 drives ---
X132.10 DI/DO 13 Output: Status, infeed ready to start (if one infeed is x
operated at the NCU with a DRIVE-CLiQ connection)
Input 2. Operating condition OFF2 drives ---
Input, external zero mark 2 ---
Input probe 2 - central measurement ---


ment
X132.12 DI/DO 14 Input 2. Operating condition OFF2 drives ---
Infeed, control line contactor ---
X132.13 DI/DO 15 Input 2. Operating condition OFF2 drives ---
In the "pre-assigned" column, the signals for which the associated SINAMICS parameters are set when
configuring a SINAMICS device are marked with "x".
Terminal Signal name Function Pre-assignment
X142.1 --- Reserved ---

X142.2 --- Reserved ---
X142.3 DI0 NC input $A_IN[1] fixed
X142.5 Ground for terminals X142.3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 13 ---
X142.9 DO4 NC output $A_OUT[1] fixed
6.2.5 Terminal assignment NX1x.3

The table lists the assignments of the terminals on an NX1x.3 for the X122 terminal strip.

The SINAMICS device configuration sets the following preassignment:
Number Function Signal Pre-assign‐

ment
X122.1 DI 0 Input ON/OFF1 infeed (if one infeed with a DRIVE-CLiQ con‐ x
nection is operated at the NX)
Input infeed operation - "infeed ready signal" (if no infeed with x
DRIVE-CLiQ connection is operated at the NX)
X122.2 DI 1 Input 2. Operating condition OFF3 drives x
Freely available --
X122.3 DI 2 Selection safe standstill group 1 --
SH/SBC - Group 1 SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH = p9601
release)
X122.4 DI 3 Selection safe standstill group 2 --
SH/SBC - Group 2 SINAMICS Safety Integrated (SH = p9601
release)
X122.5 DI 16 Freely available --
X122.6 DI 17 Freely available --
X122.7 Reference potential for terminals 1…6
X122.8 Mass
X122.9 DI/DO 8 Status safe standstill group 1 -
SH/SBC - Group 1
X122.10 DI/DO 9 Status safe standstill group 2 --
SH/SBC - Group 2
X122.11 Mass
X122.12 DI/DO 10 Input, external zero mark - BERO 1 --
X122.13 DI/DO 11 Input, external zero mark 2/1 --
Input 2. Operating condition OFF2 drives --
X122.14 Mass
Those signals for which the associated SINAMICS parameters are set for the SINAMICS device
configuration are marked with "x" in the "Pre-assigned" column.
6.2.6 Support for the terminal assignment
Support for terminal assignment

The following overview shows the terminal assignment of those drive units (NCU, NX) involved
in the SINAMICS drive line-up.
"Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Inputs/outputs" operating area:

Figure 6-2 Interconnection of the digital inputs/outputs
6.2.7 BICO interconnections
Introduction
Each drive unit contains a large number of input and output variables as well as internal control
variables. BICO technology (binector connector technology) allows the drive to be adapted to
a wide variety of conditions.
Digital and analog signals, which can be interconnected as required by means of BICO
parameters, are identified by the prefix BI, BO, CI, or CO in their parameter name. These
parameters are identified accordingly in the parameter list or in the function diagrams:
● Binectors (digital): BI: Binector input, BO: Binector output
● Connectors (analog): CI: Connector input, CO: Connector output
To interconnect two signals, a BICO input parameter (signal sink) must be assigned to the
required BICO output parameter (signal source).

Representation on the control

The following dialog provides support for the BICO interconnection of the components on the
SINAMICS drive line-up:
Figure 6-3 Example: "Interconnections"
References
"Function Plans" section in the SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763271)

6.3 Guided commissioning of SINAMICS drives
6.3.1 Initializing the system
System run-up
After the system has powered up, the "Machine" operating area is displayed:
Alarm response
When loading the project, the PLC is brought into the STOP state. The NC interprets this STOP
state, with a corresponding alarm response, as failure of the PLC. A "Reset (po)" is required for
PLC-NC synchronization. The system responds with alarms. To output all alarms, switch to the
"Diagnostics → Alarms" operating area. Additional support for the diagnostics of the drive
system is provided in Chapter Diagnostics → drive system (Page 173).
Initializing the system

Procedure:
1. Press the <MENU SELECT> key to switch to the "Commissioning" operating area:
The Commissioning operating area is displayed without password:

2. Press the "Password >" softkey and then the "Set password" softkey.

3. Enter the password for the "Manufacturer" access level and confirm this with "OK".
4. Press the "Reset (po)" softkey and confirm with "Yes".

The PLC then goes into the RUN state, and the commissioning of the SINAMICS drives is
started with the device configuration.

6.3.2 Device configuration of the drive system
Automatic initial commissioning

Procedure:
1. After the complete drive system has run-up, a dialog box for automatic device configuration
is displayed: "A device configuration must be performed for the drive system (all drive units)."
2. Select "OK" to start the automatic device configuration. The system topology is then
automatically read-out. This operation can take several minutes.
Alternative: Select "Cancel" to carry out manual commissioning (see: Manual
commissioning of SINAMICS drives (Page 139)).

3. The system then requests a Power-On Reset. Confirm with "Yes". This operation can take
several minutes.
4. After the Power-On Reset, switch to the commissioning wizard for the infeed.
5. Confirm with "OK", the "Configuration" dialog box then appears.
Note
Establish a defined initial state
If the device configuration does not start automatically, device configuration has already been
performed:
Load the "Factory settings" to create a defined state or restart. This restores a defined output
state.

Configuration after initial commissioning

The "Configuration" dialog contains a list of the connected components of the selected drive
unit:
Assignment of the components to the drive objects: For example the assignments of the Motor
Modules, motors and encoders to the drive objects and their assignments to the NC machine
axes (only after axis assignment).
6.3.3 Configuring the infeed
Configuring the infeed

The configuration is described using the example of a SINAMICS S120 Booksize Active Line
Module (ALM).

Procedure:
1. Select "Change >" to configure the infeed:
2. The characteristic data of the infeed detected by the automatic device configuration is
displayed:
The following functions can also be activated:

– If you activate the "LED to flash for recognition" option, then the selected infeed will flash
alternately red-green.
– Select the filter type which is connected in front of the infeed from the list under "Line
filter". If it is a filter with temperature monitoring (AIM = Active Interface Module), then this
is automatically activated with the selection (default setting). This option must be
activated if you have inserted a Basic Line Filter in front of the AIM to dampen the
interference emission and RFI suppression.

– This option is selected if a Voltage Sensing Module has been detected.

– If you activate the external brake control module option, the monitoring of the brake
control module is activated. This requires the appropriate terminal wiring (parameter
p3866 to terminal X21.4 for S120 Booksize,) to have been established, otherwise alarm
206900 is output.
– If you set the option "Activate external brake control module", the function module for the
brake control module is activated. This can be used to monitor the module.
To do so, set the corresponding terminal wiring (e.g. parameter p3866 to terminal X21.4
for S120 Booksize), otherwise alarm 206900 is output. In addition, make a BICO
interconnection from the infeed to the free terminals on the NCU. The parameters that
must be connected for this purpose can be found in the function diagram for the brake
control module in the SINAMICS S120 List Manual.

3. Select "Next step >".
The power data of the infeed is configured here:

– When the checkbox is selected, the line/DC link identification is activated once the infeed
pulse enable has been activated (p3410). The infeed then switches to operational mode.
Note
DC link identification
If the line supply environment changes or the components on the DC link change (e.g.
after setting up the equipment at the customer site or after expanding the drive group),
the checkbox must be set again: Hence the "Power data" softkey in the overview in order
to restart the line/DC link circuit identification.
If p3410 = 5 is saved in the commissioning archive, then the line/DC link identification
starts automatically once the drive data is input into the archive.
Only then can it be guaranteed that the infeed operates with the optimum controller
settings.
– Enter the device connection voltage: This is the basis for monitoring the line voltage
(p0281 - p0283), whereby an alarm is triggered in the case of an overshoot or
undershoot. (Alarm threshold and shutdown threshold). The actual line voltage is
determined automatically and the adjustment is made based on this value.
– The actual line frequency for the infeed is determined automatically.
– In parameters p0284, p0285, set a threshold above which an alarm is triggered (default
setting of the monitoring: 45 Hz to 65 Hz).

4. Select "Next step >".
Use a line contactor to ensure galvanic isolation of the drive line-up and the DC link from the
line supply.
The checkbox for the infeed is selected by default. This means that the BICO
interconnection (ON/OFF, both directions) is set with the initial commissioning in
accordance with the default setting. Activate the checkbox in order to restore the default
setting for the terminal wiring.
If you use an external line contactor in front of the infeed, you can control it automatically via
SINAMICS. To do this, set the checkbox to activate the "SINAMICS internal line contactor
control" function.
Control via the PLC is also possible as an alternative. The connection is made via the
reserved terminals displayed.
– X132.12: Output terminal infeed for line contactor control
– X132.4: Input terminal infeed for line contactor feedback signal
It is not possible to internally control the line contactor using a drive object on the NCU, as
the line contactor must be controlled from an external PLC or hardware control.

5. Select "Next step >". All data with which the infeed has been configured is displayed in the
summary:
Select the option save "Text in the ../A_INF_02.txt file".

6. Select "Finish >" to complete the infeed configuration.

7. Confirm with "OK ✓" to save the configuration data to a non-volatile memory.
8. Then the following overview (multiple pages) is displayed:

6.3.4 Configuration of two infeeds connected in parallel
Condition
The SINAMICS S120 supports the parallel connection of Line Modules under the following
conditions:
● Same type
● Same type rating:
Available for following Active Line Modules: 55, 80 and 120 kW
● Same rated voltage
● Same firmware version
The parallel connection of two Active Line Modules in booksize format must be supplied by a
shared line connection and controlled synchronously by a shared Control Unit. The modules
must not be connected to galvanically isolated lines.
Benefits
For space reasons, some applications require the use of Line Modules in booksize format, but
the available performance range with a single booksize Line Module is insufficient for the
application.
The parallel connection of booksize Active Line Modules offers the following advantages:
● Extension of the power range by higher S1 and maximum powers for S120 in booksize
format
● Higher maximum prechargeable DC-link capacity up to 38 mF
● Only a shared DC link with energy exchange between all connected drives is required.
● Usable in Active Mode, Smart Mode and Extended Smart Mode of the infeed
● Commissioning is simple because no additional parameter assignment is required.
– The commissioning engineer sees only a larger Active Line Module.
– No additional effort is required for commissioning and data backup.

Topology
Select the "Commissioning" → softkey "Drive system" → softkey "Topology" operating area: The
two Line Modules are represented in the topology view:
Infeeds connected in parallel

The system detects that the infeed has not yet been commissioned and that initial
commissioning is required:
1. Press the "Change >" softkey to start the commissioning.
2. The data of the Line Module project data is read out and displayed. The two Active Line
Modules connected in parallel can be recognized by the doubled rated power minus the
derating factor of 5%.
Example for 2 x 55 kW: Rated power = 104.50 kW

3. Accept the default setting of the line data or adjust the data to the power supply conditions
at the operating site.
4. Accept the default setting for the terminal wiring.
5. Check the configuration in the summary. Press the "Finish >" softkey to complete the
commissioning.
You can also save the configuration data in a text file.

6. Confirm the prompt with "Yes" to save the data to non-volatile memory.
7. Select "Cancel" to display the overview of the infeed: The two infeeds connected in parallel
are now commissioned.

Checking infeed parameters

You can check the setting of the following parameters with the "Machine data" → softkey "Infeed
parameters":
Parameter Meaning
p0108.15 = 1 Parallel connection of function module activated
r0200[0] Current power unit code number of the first ALM
r0200[1] Current power unit code number of the second ALM
… …
r0204[0] Power unit hardware properties of the first ALM
r0204[1] Power unit hardware properties of the second ALM
r7000 = 2 Parallel connection, number of active power units
p7001[0] = 1 Parallel connection, enabling of power units
p7001[1] = 1 Parallel connection, enabling of power units
…
Further information can be found in:

● SINAMICS S120 Drive Functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109763287) Function Manual, Chapter "Function modules" → "Parallel connection of power
units".
● SINAMICS S120 Application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109759667) "Parallel connection Active Line Modules in booksize format"
6.3.5 Configuring drive components
Introduction
The following components are parameterize/configured with the drive wizard:
● Motor
● Encoder
● Interface signals
Parameterizing/configuring
Guided commissioning navigates you through the commissioning of SINAMICS drives with
motors without SMI (Sensor Module Integrated).

For motors without SMI, when parameterizing/configuring, a distinction is made between the
following motor types:
● Catalog motors (standard motors, listed with associated motor data) (Page 125)
● Third-party motors (Page 131)
Note
Motors with SMI (DRIVE-CLiQ) are automatically configured by the drive unit during the
device configuration with a drive data set (DDS), but only with the motor measuring system;
i.e. motors with SMI only have to be configured with the drive wizard when more than one
drive/motor data set (DDS/MDS) or a second (direct) measuring system is required.

6.3.6 Commissioning catalog motors with encoder using SMC
Operating sequence
In our example a power section is to be configured with a listed motor and encoder. You are in
the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drives" menu:
1. The system detects that the drive object has not been commissioned and that an initial
2. Press the "Change" vertical softkey. The motor module type is detected and output. Activate
the available function modules.

3. Select the "Select standard motor from list" option.
4. Select the motor with the "Cursor up / Cursor down" keys.

5. Press "Next step >". Select the brake control in the "Configuration - motor holding brake"
dialog.
If a connected brake is detected when the unit is being configured, the system will
automatically activate the brake control and display the default setting "Motor holding brake
acc. to sequence control".
"Brake control diagnostics evaluation": For an AC drive with "Safe Brake Relay," the "Safe
Brake Control" function requires that the type of the brake control be set in parameter p1278,
to "Brake control with diagnostic evaluation" (p1278 = 0). This parameter is automatically
set for booksize components.
Information about the motor temperature sensor is provided in the FAQ (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/109736364).

6. Press "Next step >". An identification of the selected encoder is triggered (encoder 1).
The drive unit can identify encoders with EnDat protocol. These encoders are selected in
the encoder list in the following dialogs ("Configuration - Encoder 1" menu).
The entry "No encoder" is selected in the encoder list for encoders that the drive unit cannot
identify. The connected encoder must be configured.

7. Select the motor encoder from the list: Select the encoder with the "Cursor up / Cursor
down" keys. Alternatively, the encoder system can be parameterized manually using the
"Enter data" softkey.
8. Press "Enter data".
Check the encoder data of the connected encoder and confirm with "OK".
– Encoder type
– Incremental tracks
– Zero marks
– Synchronization

9. Press "Next step >".
10.Set the number of required drive data sets (DDS). The default setting is one drive data set.
11.You can change the settings for the control mode and the PROFIBUS telegram type.
The control mode and the PROFIBUS telegram (Page 216) are generally correctly
preassigned by the drive wizards.
12.Press "Next step >".
13.You can select the 2nd operating condition input 2nd OFF2 (external input for pulse
cancellation).

15.The configuration of a drive with listed motor has completed. You can check the
configuration in the summary.
16.Press the "Finish >" softkey.
17.Confirm the query with "Yes".

18.The next section describes how you can configure a drive with a third-party motor and a
second encoder.

6.3.7 Commissioning a third-party motor with encoder via SMC
Operating sequence
In our example a power section is to be configured with third-party motor and encoder. You are
in the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drives" menu:
1. The system detects that the drive object has not been commissioned and that an initial
2. Press the "Change" vertical softkey.

The power section (motor module) will be identified:

4. Select the "Enter motor data" option to select the motor type.
5. Press "Next step >" to select the type of the brake control in the next dialog.
If a connected brake is detected during the unit configuration, the system will automatically
activate the brake control and displays "Brake control according to procedural control".

7. Enter the data for the connected motor.

8. If you have activated the "Replacement circuit diagram data" option, press "Next step >" to
open the following dialog:
9. You can enter additional motor data here.

If more than one encoder has been selected, press "Next step >" successively to
parameterize each individual encoder:

12.Press "Next step >". An identification of the selected encoders is triggered (Encoder 1).
The drive unit can identify encoders with EnDat protocol. Select other encoders in the
encoder list:
13.Press the "Input data" softkey to check or modify the encoder data.

14.Confirm with "OK" and press "Next step >" to continue the commissioning.
The control mode and the PROFIBUS telegram are generally correctly pre-assigned by the
drive wizards.
15.Set the number of required drive data sets (DDS). The default setting: 1 DDS can be
accepted in most cases.
You can select the 2nd Operating condition input 2nd OFF2 (external input for pulse
cancellation).

The configuration of the drive (SERVO) with third-party motor is completed. You can check
the configuration in the summary.
18.Press the "Finish >" softkey.
19.Confirm the query with "Yes".

If the system detects additional drive objects that have not yet been commissioned, you will be
prompted to commission the next SERVO. Otherwise, the initial commissioning is complete.

6.3.8 First commissioning of SINAMICS drive ended
Initial commissioning of the drives completed

The initial commissioning of the SINAMICS S120 drives is completed.
The unit configuration and parameterization has been completed successfully:
● All upper LEDs of the drives (SERVO) illuminate green.
● The lower LEDs of the drives (SERVO) always continue to light yellow.
Continue with the steps for commissioning the NC.
See also
Communication between the NC and the drive (Page 211)

6.4 Manual commissioning of SINAMICS drives
6.4.1 Introduction to commissioning of SINAMICS drives
Machine configuration
Note
"Manually commissioning" is recommended for experienced commissioning engineers.

Procedure:
1. Press the <MENU SELECT> key.
2. Select the "Commissioning" operating area.
3. Press the "Drive system" softkey.

See also
The following functions for commissioning the SINAMICS drives can be performed manually:
● Restore the factory settings (Page 141)
● Update the component firmware (Page 143)
● Configure the infeed and drives
● Check and configure the PROFIBUS connection (Page 145)
6.4.2 Activate the factory settings
Introduction
After the commissioning, the "Factory setting >" function can be used reset the drive system to
the factory settings.
NOTICE
Check the voltage
Before restoring the factory settings, ensure that the EP terminal (Enable Pulses) of the infeed
(booksize: X21, chassis: X41) is de-energized.

Loading the factory settings

Procedure:
1. You are in the "Commissioning" > "Drive system" operating area.
2. Press the "Factory settings >" softkey.
3. Press the "Drive system" softkey for this example to load the factory settings for all drive
units used in the system (the NCU and NX module).
You must explicitly confirm another prompt with "OK" or "Cancel".

4. Switch the system (de-energized drive system) off and on again. Wait until communication
has been established again with the NC.
5. A message appears that an initial commissioning is required (Alarm 120402).

You have the following options in this dialog:
– If you press "OK", the "Guided commissioning" (Page 109) of the SINAMICS drives
starts.
– Press "Cancel" to continue the "Manual commissioning".
6.4.3 Firmware update of the drive components
Precondition
All NCU/NX components are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note
Automatic firmware update
As of SINAMICS V2.5, an automatic firmware update is undertaken when powering up the drive
system if required.
The correct firmware update of the SINAMICS components is performed ONLY if ALL were
inserted in the switched-off state. The subsequent insertion of components may ONLY be
performed in the switched-off state.

Loading firmware for the entire drive system

Procedure:
1. Switch on the system.
During run-up, it will be detected that an older firmware version is present. This causes the
update to start automatically and the firmware is loaded from the CompactFlash card to all
DRIVE-CLiQ components of the drive system (NCU and NX).
Note
Depending on the configuration of the SINAMICS drive line-up, a complete update of the
component firmware takes approximately 10 minutes. The firmware component currently
being updated is indicated with a flashing LED.
2. While the firmware update is running, a progress bar informs you about the current process.
In this case, the following messages are output:
Notice !
The process should not be interrupted! Please wait until the automatic firmware update
completes!
A firmware update is performed for the following drive units of the DRIVE-CLiQ components:
CU_I_3.3:1 ... 39%
CU_NX_3.15:1 ... 50%
3. The following messages are output when the firmware update completes:
Firmware update of the DRIVE-CLiQ components completed.
Notice !
Switch the control system and the entire drive system (all hardware components) off and
then on again to activate the firmware.
Then commissioning can be continued.
CU_I_3.3:1 ... 100%
CU_NX_3.15:1 ... 100%
4. Follow this prompt. You can then continue the commissioning of the drive components
(infeed, motor modules, encoders).
Note
Loading firmware for individual components
If only certain components of the drive system have an older firmware version, the update
also starts automatically and needs correspondingly less time.

6.4.4 Automatic device configuration
Introduction
The following unit configuration is performed during the initial commissioning of the drive units:
● Transfer of the DRIVE-CLiQ topology to the drive unit.
With the transfer of the topology, all components connected on the DRIVE-CLiQ are
detected and the drive-internal data traffic is initialized.
● Drive-object assignment for PROFIBUS connection.
The PROFIBUS connection via the relevant telegrams has been specified with the
configuration in the HW Config.
Operating sequence
The drive unit is in the initial commissioning state.
1. Press the "Drive units" softkey in the "Commissioning" > "Drive system" menu.
To start the device configuration for the drive system, confirm the question with "OK ✓".
2. During the unit configuration, a succession of messages containing information on the

configuration of the individual drive components are displayed. This procedure depends on
the expansion stage of the drive system and can take several minutes.

3. Confirm the following prompt with "Yes ✓" in order to read in the configuration data of the
drive units into the NC with a power on.
4. The unit configuration for the drive units and drive components of the NCU has been
completed.

5. Confirm with "OK ✓" to continue commissioning in the actual dialog "Drive system" → "Drive
units" → "Configuration". The associated components of the selected drive unit are
displayed:
6. Press "Drive unit +". If you have selected the NX, then the components belonging to the NX
are displayed.

7. If you wish to correct or change the settings in the "PROFIBUS" dialog, then press
"PROFIBUS" → "Change >".
8. Press the menu back key to return to the "Drive system overview":

6.4.5 Commissioning using a drive wizard
Introduction
Perform the drive configuration with a drive wizard. The following drive components are to be
configured:
● Active Line Module (infeed)
● Motor Module, motor and encoders (drives)
Operating sequence for drive configuration

To start the drive configuration, select the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" operating area:
Procedure:
1. Press the corresponding softkey for the drive object to be configured.
– "Infeeds"
– "Drives" for the corresponding drive object (SERVO)
Configuration is performed in the following sequence:
2. Select the component with the "Infeed+/Infeed-" or "Drive+/Drive-" vertical softkey.
3. Press the "Change >" softkey and follow the configuration steps of the drive wizard.
4. Check the power data of the infeed. (Page 113)

6.5 Configuring data sets
6.5.1 Data sets - overview
Benefits
The data set wizard in SINUMERIK Operate offers the machine manufacturer a simple and
efficient solution for duplicating and modifying data in order to configure the behavior of drives,
motors and encoders:
● Motor data set → MDS0...3
● Drive data set → DDS0...31 (max. 8 per MDS)
● Encoder data sets → EDS0...2
Reusability of the data helps to minimize the configuration effort wherever machine data for the
tuning of different components is to be generated, which is required for the synchronization of
the machine dynamics of the individual components.
Data set Wizard

Precondition: The drive must already have undergone commissioning in order be able to create
data sets.
The data sets are configured in the "Commissioning" → Drive system" → "Drives" → "Data sets"
operating area. The data set wizard provide step-by-step guidance through the configuration:
● "Add data set"
● "Remove data set" if additional data sets have already been created.
● "Modify data set"
Further information can be found in the Basic Functions (A2) and (A3) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763231) Function Manual
Boundary condition
Note
Drive parameters that affect data sets
Default setting p2038 = 0 for interface mode: SINAMICS
When a message frame is selected via p0922, the parameter p2038 influences the device-
specific assignment of the bits in the control and status words.
For p0922 = 100 ... 199, p2038 = 1 is set automatically and the change of p2038 is blocked. This
sets permanently the "SIMODRIVE 611U" Interface Mode with 8 DDS per MDS for these
message frames.

6.5.2 Adding a data set
NC/PLC interface
The factory setting is a motor data set MDS0 with a drive data set DDS0. This logic is provided
in the data set wizard in SINUMERIK Operate and corresponds with the first line:
NC/PLC interface MDS/DDS

DB31, ... DBX21.0 - 4 PLC → NC Selection
DB31, ... DBX93.0 - 4 NC → PLC Display
DB31, ... DBX130.0 - 4 NC → PLC Formatting
Blue Motor data set (MDS)

Yel‐ Drive data set (DDS)
low
Gray Invalid bit position

Example: Add a data set

Procedure:
1. Select "Add data set" to add 4 motor data sets with 1 drive data set respectively (line 4
highlighted in blue in the figure at the top):
2. After pressing "Add data set", you will be directed to Step 1 of the data set wizard. For
"Number of MDS", select: 4.

3. Press "Next step >" to select the copy source for MDS0:
The data set wizard will guide you through the next steps.
4. The summary is displayed in the final step. Press "Finish >" to accept the changes.

5. Confirm with "OK" to save the data in non-volatile memory. Saving can take several minutes.
6. The "Drives" → "Overview" dialog of the drive object is displayed. The "Select MDS >"
softkey is now available. Press "Select MDS...".
Result
The result is displayed in the "Service drive" overview:
● 4 DDS were created for each MDS.
● Following selection of the data set via PLC program, the selected data set for the drive
object is displayed; in this example MDS2.

6.5.3 Remove data set
Precondition
The "Remove data set" softkey is active under the following conditions:
● Number of DDS > 1 in the MDS ⇒ DDS can be removed.
● Number of MDS > 1 ⇒ MDS can be removed.

Example: Remove a data set

Procedure:
1. Select the "Remove data set" softkey: In Step 1, select the number of DDS which are to be
deleted for each MDS. In this example, 1 MDS.
2. In the next step, select the data set in the first column. Several data sets can also be
selected.
3. The summary is displayed in the next step. Press "Finish >" to accept the changes.
When you exit the dialog, press "Yes" to confirm the prompt to save the data to the non-volatile
memory.

Result
The result is displayed in the "Data set overview" dialog:

6.5.4 Modify data set
Example: Modify data set

If more than one encoder is assigned to the drive object, one encoder data set is assigned to
each encoder. To change assignment of the data sets, select the "Modify data sets" softkey:
Open the selection menu with the <INSERT> key. The "OK" softkey will only become active for
adoption of the change after the assignment has actually been changed.

6.6 Diagnostics → Trace
6.6.1 Selecting variables for tracing
"Trace" function
The "Trace" function is an oscilloscope function that supports you when optimizing,
troubleshooting and analyzing machines. When selecting the function in the operating area
"Diagnostics" → Menu advance key → Softkey "Trace", the list view is opened to insert variables,
whose signals are to be graphically displayed in the trace view.
A dedicated "Session type" should be used for the following variables:
● NC/PLC/servo variables
● Drive parameters
New session
Procedure:
1. Select "New trace (drive/NC) softkey >" to create a new session.
2. Selection for a session with PLC/NC/servo variables:
3. Selection for a session with drive variables:
Examples of traces sessions

Example of a trace session with servo variables (Page 160)
Using servo variables as example, the following procedure is shown:
● "Zoom (Page 163)" softkey including zoom with image section and zoom with mouse
operation
● "Scale (Page 167)" softkey
● "Cursors (Page 168)" softkey

Example of a trace session with PLC variables (Page 168)

Example of a trace session with drive variables (Page 170)
Key combinations (Page 171)
6.6.2 Example: Trace session with servo variables
Trace session sequence

The trace session is subdivided into the following steps:
● Creating and loading a part program.
● Creating a new session with servo variables.
● Settings for starting and stopping the trace.
Starting/stopping the trace from the part program

To start and stop the trace from the part program, program the $AN_SLTRACE variable that
can be selected using the "Quicklist" softkey. To do this, the following program can be used, for
example:
def int ii
SOFT
$AN_SLTRACE=0
G90 G1 X0 F10000
G4 F0.5
$AN_SLTRACE=1
G91
for ii=1 to 4
X10
G4 F0.5
X-10
G4 F0.5
endfor
$AN_SLTRACE=2
M30
Save the program and load it to the NC.

Creating a new session

Procedure:
1. Select operating area "Diagnostics" → Menu forward key → "Trace" softkey. The list view
opens:
2. Select softkey "Insert variable >" to open the list of variables.

3. Select at "Filter: Servo" to limit the selection to just servo variables.
4. The following servo variables are inserted in this particular example:
– Position actual value measuring system 1
– Position setpoint
– Torque-generating current actual value i(q)
5. Using the "Settings" softkey, matching the example, select "If variable" to start the trace.

6. Softkey "Quick List" is activated. Select variable $AN_SLTRACE and acknowledge with
"OK".
7. Matching the example, select "If variable" to stop the trace and acknowledge with "OK".
8. Select the "View trace >" softkey to open the trace view.
9. Select the "Start trace" softkey to activate the trace.
10.Execute the part program with "NC Start".

Trace result
The following graphic is displayed after the trace has been stopped:
Select the "≪ Back" softkey to save the session.

Select what you wish to save with the "Save trace >" softkey: Variables and settings with or
without recorded values (graphic).
The name of the session and target directory can be changed.
6.6.3 Example: Zooming in/zooming out
Trace view: Zoom

Procedure:
1. Select the "Fit all" softkey to scale all of the curves.
2. Press the following keys to select curve 1 (position actual value measuring system 1) and
curve 2 (position setpoint) for the next steps:
3. Select the "Zoom >" softkey.

4. Select the "Fit overlaid" softkey to precisely place both curves one above the other. Each
curve is individually scaled using the "Fit separated".

5. Select the "Zoom +" softkey or the <+> softkey to enlarge the image section.
Using the cursor keys, you can move the image section:
6. You can undo the action using keys <CTRL> + <Z>:

Alternative: Zoom with image section

Procedure:
1. Select the "Zoom area >" softkey, to select a defined zoom area:
2. Select the "Zoom +" softkey or the <+> softkey to enlarge the image section.
3. Using the cursor keys, you can move the image section:

Alternative: Zoom using the mouse

Procedure:
1. While keeping the <CTRL> key pressed, using theleft-handmouse key, drag the section of
the screen that you wish to zoom into:
2. Zoom result after releasing the left-hand mouse key:
3. You can undo the action using <CTRL> and the right-hand mouse key.

6.6.4 Example: Changing the scale
Changing the scale

Procedure:
1. Select the "≪ Back" softkey to exit the zoom area.
2. Select the "Scale >" softkey to scale the graphic in the X and Y axes:
3. After selecting softkey "X time axis" → and softkey "Scale +" - or directly entering "X
minimum" and "X maximum".
4. Confirm using softkey "✓ Finish".

6.6.5 Example: Positioning the cursor
Positioning the cursor

Procedure:
1. Select the "Cursors >" softkey and position the active cursor A at the required position.
2. Select the "Cursor B >" softkey and position the active cursor B at the required position.
3. Select the "Both Cursors" softkey in order to read the precise value of the cursor positions
below the graphic:
6.6.6 Example: Trace session with PLC variables
Trace recording of PLC signals

Procedure:
1. Using softkey "New trace (Drive/NC)", open a new session.
2. Select the "Choose variable >" softkey, and under "Filter: PLC" to restrict the selection to
PLC variables.

3. For example, select the following PLC signals:
4. Under "Settings", enter a recording duration of 50 seconds, for example.

5. Select softkey "View trace" followed by "Start trace".
The outputs are set and reset while tracing.
6. The following result is displayed after the selected trace duration has expired:

6.6.7 Example: Trace session with drive variables
Record the drive trace

Procedure:
1. Open a new session for drive variables.
2. From the list, insert parameter r722 "CU digital inputs status":
3. Select the "Settings" softkey to enter the trigger condition:

4. Select "If variable", and from the "Quick List", insert variable r722.
5. Under condition, select "At bit mask" and enter the required value as decimal number:
6. Confirm with "OK" to accept the settings.

7. Select softkey "View trace" followed by "Start trace".

8. The trace starts, if r722.1=1 and r722.2=1 are set ⇒ decimal value 6 and stops, which means
if the trigger condition is satisfied.
6.6.8 Key combinations to use the trace
Key combinations
Key combinations, which function with the control keys as well as on an external keyboard.
List view:
Copy selection.
Insert selection.
Delete selection.
Trace view:
Display the individual curves from left → right
Display the individual curves from right → left
Spaces: Select the display curve.

(corresponds to the "Select/Legend" softkey)
Arrow keys: Shift the image section either up or down.

With the cursor quickly to the right.
Move the cursor quickly to the left.
Zoom +
Zoom -
Undo the last action.

6.7 Diagnostics → drive system
Operating sequence
1. To check the status of the drive, select the "Diagnostics" → "Drive system" operating area:
2. Press the "Details" softkey to display further diagnostics data for a drive object:
3. If faults or warnings are pending for a drive object, change to the list view using the
associated softkey.

SINAMICS faults and alarms

SINAMICS alarms can be of the alert (A = Alert) or fault (F = Fault) type:
● To activate the fault and warning buffer output for SINAMICS, set
MD13150 $MN_SINAMICS_ALARM_MASK to the hexadecimal value "D0D". This
automatically outputs the pending faults and warnings of the drive in the message line.
● The parameter r0945 shows the number of faults that have occurred.
● Pending warnings are indicated by parameter r2122 of the relevant drive component.
● The number of warnings that have occurred after the last reset is available in parameter
p2111 of the drive components.
● Setting p2111 = 0 results in the deletion of all existing warnings of this component and
updates the current warnings still pending. This parameter is reset to zero for a power on of
the drive unit.
Example
To display the online help for a pending fault or warning on SINUMERIK Operate,
the line must be marked (in orange). You can find remedial measures in the online
help.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8 Modular machine
6.8.1 What does "modular machine" mean?
Definition
The modular machine concept is based on a maximum target topology created offline. The
maximum design of a particular machine type is referred to as the maximum configuration in
which all the machine components that may be used are pre-configured in the target topology.
By deactivating or deleting drive objects (p0105 = 2), sections of the maximum configuration
can be removed. If a component fails, for example, this sub-topology can also be used to allow
a machine to continue running until the spare part is available. In this case, however, no BICO
source must be interconnected from this drive object to other drive objects.
NOTICE
Data backup
To prevent data loss, save the drive data in a commissioning archive, before you make any
changes!
Drive unit - Configuration

6.8 Modular machine
The "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive unit" operating area provides the following
functions under "Configuration":
● "Configuration" > "Change >" (Page 182)
– Change the name of the drive object
– Change the name of the component
– Change the comparison level
● "Configuration" → "Sort >": (Page 182)
● "Configuration" → "Display options >":

6.8 Modular machine
Drive unit - topology

6.8 Modular machine
The "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive unit" operating area provides the following
functions under "Topology":
● "Topology" → "Change >"
– Delete a drive object
– Delete the component
– Enable/disable drive objects
– Drive object: Change name/number
– Component: Change name/number
● "Topology" → "Add component >" (Page 193)
● "Topology" → "Display options >":
Note
Changing the topology does not require that the first commissioning is repeated.

6.8 Modular machine
Example: Components without DRIVE-CLiQ

To display components, which are not connected via DRIVE-CLiQ, in the "Display options",
under "Filter" select the "off" option:
6.8.2 Example: Topology display (graphic)
Topology display
As an alternative to displaying the topology in a tabular form, it is shown graphically based on
Create MyConfig .
The following functions are supported:
● Selecting the drive device
● Displaying the actual topology
● Displaying the target topology
● Display to compare the target topology (top, white background) with the actual topology
(bottom, bright blue background)
● A fault description when faults are active
● Increasing or decreasing the size of the view using the zoom function
● Displaying the properties of the selected component
● Identifying a component using an LED

6.8 Modular machine
Note
Functional scope of the "Topology display"
The functionality under "Drive system" → "Topology display" is a display function with the
objective of identifying topology errors.
Contrary to this, in the drive unit functionality under "Drive device" → "Topology " (tabular form)
the following additional functions are integrated:
● Activating/deactivating drive objects
● Deleting drive objects
● Adding and deleting components
Target topology
The graphic topology display is shown using the "Target topology" view as example:
Figure 6-4 Target topology - without error
A DRIVE-CLiQ port is always simultaneously selected for the component in focus. The Drive-
CLiQ connection at a selected port is graphically highlighted.

6.8 Modular machine
Actual topology
The graphic topology display in the case of an error is shown using the "Actual topology" view:
Figure 6-5 Actual topology - with error
Precondition: It is assumed that the target topology has no error.

As a consequence, the errors are only displayed in the actual topology.
If a component has an error, then in addition to the symbol in the graphic,
error information is also provided at the bottom right in the detailed view.
Focus on the component involved to analyze the error that has occurred. To do this, change
into the "Topology comparison" view in order to compare the actual topology (top) with the
saved target topology (bottom).
Component properties
After switching over the vertical softkey bar, the following properties of the focused component
are displayed in the table:
$[LV $;;
'ULYHREMHFW
'2QDPH 6(592B
'2QXPEHU
7\SH >@6(592
'2VWDWXV 'ULYHREMHFWDFWLYH
'2YDULDEOH
&RPSRQHQW
&RPSRQHQWQDPH 60B
&RPSRQHQWQXPEHU
7\SH
&RPSRQHQWVWDWXV >@&RPSRQHQWDFWLYH
'HYLFH
'HYLFHFODVV 6HQVRU0RGXOH
$UWLFOHQXPEHU 6/$$%$
6HULDOQXPEHU 762
&RPSDULVRQOHYHO KLJK

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.3 Modify configuration
Drive unit - Configuration "Change >"

Procedure:
1. Press the "Change > " softkey to change the configuration.
"Cancel" can be used backup the drive data if it does not yet exist.
2. If a data backup is available, confirm with "OK".

3. Navigate with the arrow keys to the drive object / component that is to be changed.
4. Press the "INSERT" key to enter the new designation.

6.8 Modular machine
Drive unit - Configuration "Sort >"

Procedure:
1. Press the "Sort >" softkey to open the display of the sort criteria.
2. Select one of the following sort criteria for the display from:
– Drive object: The display is sorted according to the drive object number.
– Wiring: The display is sorted according to wiring of the drive components in the drive
system.
– Component number: The display is sorted according to the component number.
– Axis number: The display is sorted according to the axis number.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.4 Check topology
Comparing topologies
Once you have parameterized the drive components, you can check the topology:
1. Select "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive unit" → "Topology" in the operating area.
2. Set the actual/target topology comparison for "Display options".
The topology of individual drive components is displayed:
3. This means you are supported during the check whether the displayed target topology
matches the actual topology of the system.
Note
You will need the component numbers in order to configure direct measuring systems
manually.
See also
Diagnostics → drive system (Page 173)

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.5 Changing topology
Drive unit - Topology "Change >"

Procedure:
1. Press the "Change > " softkey to change the topology.
"Cancel" backs up the drive data if it does not yet exist.

6.8 Modular machine
3. Navigate with the arrow keys to the drive object / component that is to be changed.
4. Press the "INSERT" key to enter the new designation.
In the example, the drive object is changed from number "3" to number "30".
Note
Effect
The change of the name and number is applied to the data in the target and actual
topologies of the drive software. Changing the comparison level affects the topology
comparison in the drive software.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.6 Activating or deactivating a drive object
Activating/deactivating drive objects

Operating sequence:
1. Select with the arrow keys a drive object.
2. Press the "Activate/deactivate drive object" softkey
3. Follow the instructions in the information text.

6.8 Modular machine
4. Once successfully deactivated, the drive object and the associated components are grayed
out.
5. If you want to reactivate the drive object, press the "Activate/deactivate drive object" softkey
and follow the instructions in the information text.
Example series commissioning

When commissioning several machines (series) of the same type, a drive object that is not
present is marked with p0105 = 0. This creates a commissioning archive that is transferred to
the next machine.
To avoid triggering the alarm 201416, the serial number of this component must be deleted and
the p0105 = 2 parameter of this component must be set to "Deactivate drive object and not
present".
Note
General conditions for deactivating:
● If a component is deactivated, only the component with the correct serial number or none
may be inserted.
● If a component with a different serial number is inserted, this is by definition a different
component. If no other component remains, it must certainly be an excess component. This
component is marked as an additional component and alarm 201416 triggered.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.7 Deleting a drive object
Deleting a drive object

Procedure:
1. Navigate with the arrow keys to the drive object that is to be deleted.
2. Press the "Delete drive" softkey.
A security prompt follows to delete the drive object.

6.8 Modular machine

The drive object is deleted from the target topology.
4. The see the change in the topology, the "Actual/target topology comparison" display options
must be set:
Result: The module can now be removed.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.8 Delete the component
Delete the component

Procedure:
1. You are in the "Topology" dialog and have selected the "Change" mode:
2. Navigate with the arrow keys to the component to be deleted.
If you select a component, the "Delete component" softkey is active.

6.8 Modular machine
3. Press the "Delete component" softkey, in this example: Sensor SM_14 (sin/cos).
A security prompt follows to delete the component.
4. If you are sure, confirm with "OK". The component is deleted from the target topology.
If the component is not yet available in the actual topology, i.e. still connected, an alarm is
output and the component highlighted in red. To see the change in the topology, the "Actual/
target topology comparison" display options must be set.
5. Remove the module.

6.8 Modular machine
6.8.9 Adding components
Adding components
If you connect a new component (e.g. SMC20) via DRIVE-CLiQ to the drive system, the drive
detects the change in the actual topology and displays the actual/target topology difference.
● GRAY: Desired state, drive object / component not plugged in or deactivated in the drive
system. Use the cursor keys to select the required line. The state is indicated in the bottom
part of the window.
● RED: Actual state, drive object/component available in the actual topology.
New components that have not yet been commissioned have a component number > "200";
in this example, the number "210".
The new component must then be configured and assigned to a drive object (Motor Module)
using the drive wizard.
Note
Only plug in (connect) components when the drive unit is switched off.
In the "Topology" dialog, start at the actual state: The new component has not been connected
yet.

6.8 Modular machine
Procedure:
1. To connect a new DRIVE-CLiQ component (e.g. SMC20) to a Motor Module, select
"Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive device" → "Topology" in the operating area.
2. Navigate with the arrow keys to the component that should be inserted in the topology and
press the "Add component >" softkey. The system recognizes the new component and
outputs a message.

6.8 Modular machine
3. Press "OK" as confirmation to configure and accept this component. Determining the device
configuration may take several minutes.
Depending on the device configuration, you will be prompted to perform further actions or
to cancel:
To adapt the cyclical data traffic between NCK and SINAMICS to the configuration of the
SINAMICS, a RESET must be performed in the NCK and in the drive system. Should a
RESET be performed in the NCK and in the drive system?
4. Press "OK" to confirm that an NCK and drive system reset should be performed. The unit
configuration is finished. The component has been accepted. The following message will
then appear:
5. Press "OK" to include the component in the topology again although it is not yet assigned to
any drive:
– Select "Drive unit" to open the drive wizard. Select the drive and assign the new encoder
in the encoder configuration (Page 123) to the drive.
– Press "OK" to assign this component to the drive later.
6.8.10 Replacing a SINAMICS S120 component
Requirements
There are two procedures for replacing components:
1. Replacing SMI or SMx motor components.
2. Replacing an existing Motor Module with a more powerful Motor Module.

6.8 Modular machine
The following preconditions are satisfied:

● The two Motor Modules are of the same type.
● The serial number is different: ⇒ In this case, another configuration is not required.
● The difference between the two Motor Modules, for example, is 9 A instead of 5 A.
Note
Do not make a permanent change in the drive system.
Before you replace the DRIVE-CLiQ component, change the comparison level.
Replacing SMI or SMx motor components
Note
The new SMI/SMx motor component must not yet be inserted!
Operating sequence:
1. You have removed the previous SMI or SMx motor component.
This motor component is missing in the actual topology. SINAMICS indicates this in the form
of a topology error alarm.
The "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Topology" dialog shows the
previous motor component to be replaced in "gray", i.e. present only in the target topology.
2. In the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Topology" → "Change..." dialog,
remove the SMI/SMx motor component awaiting replacement from the target topology
using the "Delete component" (Page 191) dialog.
NOTICE
Data loss
Save the drive data that has been changed before switching off (for example, to a drive
data archive).
3. Switch off the drive system and switch on again.

4. In the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Topology" dialog, check
whether the SMI/SMx motor component has been removed from the target topology:
– The alarm topology error is no longer pending.
– The "Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Topology" dialog no longer
shows any differences.
5. Switch off the drive system.
6. Plug in the new SMI/SMx motor component.
7. Switch on the drive system.

6.8 Modular machine
8. Add the new SMI/SMx motor component to the target topology using the "Commissioning"
→ "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "Topology" → "Add component" (Page 193) dialog.
9. Assign the added SMI/SMx motor component via the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" →
"Drives" drive wizard.
Replacing a Motor Module

The replacement of components after the first commissioning, e.g. in order to use an ALM with
a higher power 16 kW → 50 kW, must be performed in such a way that the configuration data
is reimported and is up to date.
Note
Firmware update
The firmware of the configured drive components is updated correctly only when the
components were inserted in the switched-off state. The subsequent insertion of drive
components must ONLY be performed in the switched-off state.
If a drive component is replaced by a component with a different article number, e.g. a more
powerful module, after first commissioning, observe the following sequence:
Procedure:
1. Select "Drive unit" → "Topology" → "Change".
2. Select the module and select "Deactivate drive object".
3. Replace the module in the cabinet.
4. Select the module and select "Activate drive object".
5. The configuration data of the new module is read in.
6. Update the drive data in the commissioning archive with the new configuration data.
6.8.11 Example: Subsequently installing a component
Precondition
To write to Control Unit parameters and drive parameters and activate them, as a minimum, the
"Service" access level is required.

6.8 Modular machine
Overview of the drive state

Using the "Activate drives" softkey, in the "Drive state overview" open a table listing all of the
drive objects, which shows the actual state of parameter p0105: "Activate/deactivate drive
objects". Furthermore, the connection status is shown as a symbol:
DO status (p0105) Symbol Significance

[0] deactivated The component is not inserted, and the status is
deactivated.
[0] deactivated The component is inserted, and the status is de‐
activated
[1] activated The component is inserted, and the status is acti‐
vated.
[1] activated The component is inserted, and the status is acti‐
vated: Component with fault.
[2] deactivated without - without symbol - The component is not inserted, the status is deac‐
hardware tivated:
However, the component is included in the target
topology.
Note
Status p0105 = [2] deactivated without hardware
In the "Drive state overview", only the two states "[1] activated" and "[0] deactivated" are listed
for a drive object.
If a drive object exists with status [2] deactivated without hardware, then the status must be
changed to "[0] deactivated" and then the hardware component must be inserted and
connected.
The "Data backup" column shows the following symbols:
The backup of the drive parameters for every drive object is saved at:
/user/sinamics/smi/backup
Parameter data of drive objects are copied to the CompactFlash card of the control
system from a Create MyConfig package.
If the configuration parameters are overwritten when subsequently connecting the
motor with DQI encoder for the automatic controller data calculation, then when
activating, these parameters are again written to the drive object.
Subsequently inserting a component

In a Create MyConfig package, you can define and transfer the configuration parameters of the
"electronic rating plate" for motors with DQI encoder, without the hardware component having
to be already installed. The motor and encoder data are then already transferred to the
CompactFlash card when reading in the archive; however, the parameters are only activated
after the motor has been installed.
The following procedure applies both when commissioning as well as when replacing parts and
components.

6.8 Modular machine
Press the "Activate all" softkey to execute the following steps:

1. Read out the motor data on the electronic rating plate.
2. In comparison to p0300 "Select motor type", check as to whether the configured data match
the configured component.
3. Activate the drive object.
4. Automatically calculate the controller data.
5. Overwrite parameters with the configured data from the Create MyConfig package.
6. Backup the parameters.
This operation can take several minutes. A progress display is shown.
When changing the status from "[0] deactivated" → "[1] activated" the backup of this drive object
is created in the following directory on the CompactFlash card: /user/sinamics/smi/backup. The
data for all drive objects is saved at: /user/sinamics/data
If several drive objects are selected, then you can select different procedures for each of the
individual drive objects:
1. "Only activate" softkey to activate parameters that are already saved to the CompactFlash
card.
2. "CMC data" softkey, to calculate the controller data and to activate the data saved from a
Create MyConfig package to the CompactFlash card.
3. "Last backup" softkey to restore the last data backup of the drive object from the backup file.
4. "Exit" softkey to exit the view of the drive objects.
5. You have the following alternatives after successfully completing the procedure:
– "Cancel" softkey to exit the procedure without restarting the system. As a consequence,
the parameters are not yet active.
– Press the softkey "Accept" to activate the parameters and to execute a restart the system
Reset (po).
Replacing a device
Service & Support Portal: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/99457853)
SIMOTICS Service Manual: Encoder replacement for SIMOTICS S- 1FK7 G2, S-1FG1 and
S-1FT7

6.9 Tips for commissioning the SINAMICS drives
6.9.1 Firmware version display of drive components
Firmware version of the drive components

The versions of the drive components are output from "Commissioning" → "Drive system" →
"Drive units" → Configuration" in the "FW version" column. For example: 4806000 ⇒ firmware
version: 04.80.60.00
Figure 6-6 "Drive units" - "Configuration"
Using certain parameters from individual drive components, it is also possible to view the
relevant firmware version for:
● SINAMICS S120 system software in parameter r0018
● Firmware version of the drive components in parameter r0975[2,10]
● Firmware version of the Sensor Module in parameter r0148[0…2]
System software SINAMICS S120

The version of the SINAMICS S120 software available in the system can be found in parameter
r0018 for the Control Unit machine data:
Example: r0018 = 4806000 ⇒ system software: 04.80.60.00
Firmware version of the drive components

The firmware version of all individual components can be individually fetched from parameters
r975[2] and r975[10] for each drive component (NCU, ALM, power section).

Example:
r0975[2] = 450, r0975[10] = 3000 ⇒ firmware version: 04.80.60.00
Firmware version of all Sensor Modules

The firmware version of all Sensor Modules can be retrieved from parameter r0148[0…2] on
the associated Motor Module.
Example: r0148[0] = 4806000 ⇒ firmware version: 04.80.60.00 of the connected Sensor
Module.
6.9.2 Check the line data of the infeed
Introduction
The line data setting of the power supply must be checked and set in SINAMICS during
commissioning.
Checking and setting the line data

The "Line data" softkey is active in the "Commissioning" → "Drive units" → "Infeed" operating
area if the infeed has already been commissioned and the data has been saved in non-volatile
memory:

The following line data is configured here:

● When the checkbox is selected, the line/DC link identification is activated once the infeed
pulse has been enabled (p3410). The infeed then switches to operational mode.
Note
DC link identification
If the line supply environment changes or the components on the DC link change (e.g. after
setting up the equipment at the customer site or after expanding the drive group), the
checkbox must be set again: Hence the "Line data" softkey in the overview in order to restart
the line/DC link circuit identification.
If p3410 = 5 is saved in the commissioning archive, then the line/DC link identification starts
automatically once the drive data is input into the archive.
Only then can it be guaranteed that the infeed operates with the optimum controller settings.
● Enter the device connection voltage: This is the basis for monitoring the line voltage (p0281
- p0283), whereby an alarm is triggered in the case of an overshoot or undershoot. (Alarm
threshold and shutdown threshold). The actual line voltage is determined automatically and
the adjustment is made based on this value.
● The actual line frequency for the infeed is determined automatically.
In parameters p0284, p0285, set a threshold above which an alarm is triggered (default
setting of the monitoring: 45 Hz to 65 Hz).
● Quick stop for axes when the voltage dips after a delay time in [ms]:
In the event of a voltage dip, alarm 207862 "External fault 3" followed by alarm 207841
"Infeed operation withdrawn" are triggered, and the associated fault response is initiated
from p2101. If an alarm is not to be initiated for very short voltage dips, this can be configured
with the ON-delay time p2101.
The switch-on delay is not active for each specific drive, but per infeed – and therefore for
all the drives connected to this infeed. This does not affect alarms, for example from the DC
link, and they continue to be triggered.
6.9.3 Identifying the infeed automatically or manually
Introduction
The control optimization in the ALM is also performed with the identification of the ALM. Here,
the inductance and capacity of the DC link are determined and the optimum control data
determined for the set-up converter.
Identification can only be performed after the controller and the drive have been put into
operation.

Procedure for the automatic identification of the ALM

The identification of the ALM is performed automatically by the system in the current SINAMICS
versions as soon as the first drive has been commissioned and the X122.1 enable terminal
activated. This automatically starts an internal optimization sequence that takes approx. 20
seconds to complete.
During this optimization sequence, enable terminal X122.1 should not be deactivated;
otherwise the optimization would be aborted. If optimization is aborted, identification may be
carried out manually at a later stage by the user.
Procedure for the manual identification of the ALM

The identification of the ALM is performed as follows:
1. Disconnect release (AUS1) ALM (X122.1) by the commissioning engineer.
2. Select machine data for the infeed (ALM) in the "Commissioning" > "Machine data" > "Infeed
MD" menu.
3. Initiate identification on the ALM: p3410 = 5.
4. Connect ALM enable (the enable must remain pending during the execution of the first step
of the identification).
5. The ALM controller data is reset automatically and power supply identification starts.
6. After a successful identification, p3410 is automatically set to 0 and the values for the
controller data of the ALM are saved automatically. Check: p3402 = 9 (Release has to
remain during the execution of this step of the identification!).
7. Disconnect ALM enable (X122.1) by the commissioning engineer.
8. The optimized infeed data is saved automatically. The data does not need to be saved
manually (p0977 = 1).
6.9.4 Rules for wiring the DRIVE-CLiQ interface
Topology rules
When wiring components with DRIVE-CLiQ, the following rules apply: The rules are subdivided
into obligatory rules, which must be observed, and optional rules, which enable automatic
topology detection if they are adhered to.
Obligatory rules:
● A maximum of 198 DRIVE-CLiQ node components can be connected for each NCU.
● Up to 16 nodes can be connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket.
● A maximum of seven nodes can be connected in one row. A row is always considered from
the perspective of the closed-loop control module.
● Ring wiring is not permitted.
● Components must not be double-wired.

Optional rules:
When the optional rules for the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring are observed the components concerned
will be automatically assigned to the drives:
● For one Motor Module, the related motor encoder must also be connected.
● Due to the improved performance utilization, use as many DRIVE-CLiQ points on the NCU
as possible.
● It is essential that you comply with the optional rules when using the macro. This is the only
way to achieve a proper assignment of the drive components.
1&8
; $/0 600 '00

;
; ; '5,9(&/L4
; ; ; ;
; ; ; ;
; ; ; ;
60& 60& 60&
; ; ;
; ; ;
0RWRUFDEOH
0 0 0
NCU SINUMERIK control system

SMM Single Motor Module
DMM Double Motor Module
M Motor
Figure 6-7 Topology example
Use of the SMC40

The SMC40 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is used to convert encoder signals from absolute
encoders with EnDat 2.2 to DRIVE-CLiQ. Two encoder systems with EnDat 2.2 can be
connected to the SMC40. Their signals are converted independent of each other on two DRIVE-
CLiQ encoder signals.

Connection conditions
To ensure that the SMC40 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted is integrated into the topology
during the initial commissioning, you must absolutely observe the following rules:
● Connect at least one of the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500/1 or X500/2 on the SMC40 using
DRIVE-CLiQ.
● Connect one EnDat encoder to the corresponding encoder interface X520/1 (to X500/1) or
X520/2 (to X500/2).
● Operate the SMC40 only in a star topology. The DRIVE-CLiQ X500/1 and X500/2 sockets
cannot be used for a series connection.
NOTICE
Display in the "Topology" dialog
The SMC40 is only integrated into the actual topology if the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500/x
and the corresponding encoder interfaces X520/x are assigned.
Without a connected encoder, it is also not possible to subsequently integrate the SMC40 in
the topology.
6.9.5 Drive-object assignment for PROFIBUS connection
Drive object number

PROFIBUS telegrams (internal PROFIBUS, HW Config) are used to specify the process data
to be exchanged between the NC and the drives. The sequence of the drive objects
(configurable/configured using HW Config) involved in PROFIBUS process-data exchange is
defined via a drive-object list.
The drive-object numbers (DO numbers) can be viewed under "Commissioning > Machine data
> Control Unit MD/Infeed MD/Drive MD" in the component name line. An example of a Control
Unit name might be: "DP3.Slave3:CU_003 (1)". The DO number appears inside the brackets
"(…)".
List of drive objects

You usually configure eight drive objects (default setting): The drive objects have drive-object
numbers and are entered in parameter p0978[0…9] as a list of drive objects:
p0978[0] = 3 Motor Module 1

p0978[6] = 1 Control Unit

p0978[7] = 2 Infeed (ALM)

p0978[8] = 0 ---
p0978[n] = 0 ---
PROFIBUS telegram 370 for the infeed (ALM) is not supported by SINUMERIK. However,
according to the SINAMICS rule, all DO from parameter p0101 have to be assigned in
parameter p0978. For this reason, the DO number of the infeed should be entered in index 9.
Note
The list of DO involved in process-data exchange is completed by entering the value "0".
The list of drive objects is already preassigned in the following sequence by the system upon
initializing the drive (acceptance of topology): ALM, 1st Motor Module … n, CU; e.g. 2-3-4-5-1.
Components that do not communicate via PROFIBUS automatically have "255" preassigned to
them.
Example: Assigning drive objects

The following table shows on a SINAMICS S120 component structure the drive object
assignment for the drive parameters:
● One Control Unit (CU)
● One Active Line Module (ALM)
● Three Motor Modules
Assignment p0978[0…9] for supply with DRIVE-CLiQ connection:
Component Index p0978 List of drive objects

1. Motor Module 0 3
2. Motor Module 1 4
3. Motor Module 2 5
not found 3 2551)
not found 4 2551)
not found 5 2551)
CU 6 1
ALM (only if protocol 370 is available) 7 2551)
not found 8 02)
ALM (default setting for SINUMERIK) 9 2
1) Not active
2) Ends the exchange of PZD
The following table describes the assignment of the drive objects in p0978[0…9] for an infeed
without DRIVE-CLiQ connection. This assignment is also done for a drive group with NX
module.

Assignment of p0978[0…9] for infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ connection:
Component Index p0978 List of drive objects

1. Motor Module 0 2
2. Motor Module 1 3
3. Motor Module 2 4
not found 3 2551)
not found 4 2551)
not found 5 2551)
CU 6 1
ALM (only if protocol 370 is available) 7 2551)
not found 8 02)
not found 9 0
1) Not active
2) Ends the exchange of PZD

Example: Drive group

Using the example of a SINAMICS S120 drive line-up, the significance of the drive components
on drive objects is shown: Each drive object has its own parameter list.

1&8
$/0 600 600 600
;
;
;
; ; ; ; ;

; ; ; ; ;
; ; ; ; ;
60& 60&

; ;
; ;

0 0 0
,QIHHG0'ර
&RQWURO8QLW0' 'ULYH0'ර 'ULYH0' 'ULYH0'ර
ර $FWLYH/LQH $[LVSDUDPHWHU ර $[LVSDUDPHWHUOLVW
&RQWURO8QLW 0RGXOHSDUDPHWHU OLVW $[LVSDUDPHWHU
SDUDPHWHUOLVW OLVW OLVW
Drive object DO3 comprises the following components:

③ Single Motor Module
⑧ SMC20
⑨ Motor encoder (direct measuring system)
⑩ Motor
Figure 6-8 Drive group
The component number is assigned by the drive after detection of the DRIVE-CLiQ topology.
The associated component numbers can be found in the "Commissioning" → "Machine data" →
"Drive MD" → "Select axis" operating area:
Parameter Parameter designation

p0121 Power unit component number
p0131 Motor component number
p0141 Sensor Module (encoder interface) component number
p0142 Encoder component number

6.9.6 Adjusting speed and brake behavior
Speed adjustment
The following parameters can be set in the "Commissioning" → "Machine data" → "Drive MD"
operating area:
Speed adjustment:
● Spindle drive:
p0500 = 102, speed setpoint in p0322 corresponds to setpoint 4000 0000hex
● Feed drive:
p0500 = 101, speed setpoint in p0311 corresponds to setpoint 4000 0000hex
The speed setpoint can be diagnosed in the relevant drive in r2050[1+2] and r2060[1].
Brake behavior OFF3

Depending on the requirements, the brake behavior for each drive can be adjusted to the signal
2. OFF3.
Default setting p1135 = 0 brake with maximum current.
Using drive-specific parameterization, a flatter braking ramp can be set with the parameters
p1135, p1136, p1137 .
Maximum braking ramp setting: 600 seconds.


Communication between the NC and the drive 7
7.1 Overview of NC and drive communication
What will be configured next?

The initial commissioning of the PLC and SINAMICS drives is completed.
The machine data that communicates with the drive is:
● General machine data
General machine data required for communication with the drive via PROFIBUS that has
been preset with default values. These values can be taken over during the initial
commissioning:
– The telegram type for transfer
– The logical addresses for the PLC
● Axis-specific machine data
The axis component for transfer of the setpoints and actual values for the relevant axis, is
set in the axis machine data.
Assignment of machine data

Using the example of a SINAMICS S120 module structure (one NCU, one ALM, three Motor
Modules (MM)), the following table illustrates the assignment of the machine data for input
address/output address/telegram/setpoint/actual value.
SINAMICS STEP 7 (HW Config) General machine data Axis machine data2)
S120 DP slave properties
Component Message frame I/O ad‐ MD13120[0] MD13050 MD13060 MD30110/ MD30130
type and length dress1) I/O address1) [0...5] I/O ad‐ [0...5] mes‐ MD30220 Type of out‐
dress1) sage frame setpoint / put Setpoint
type actual val‐
ue assign‐
ment
MM1 136 - PZD-11/19 4100 4100 136 1 1
MM2 136 - PZD-11/19 4140 4140 136 2 1
MM3 136 - PZD-11/19 4180 4180 136 3 1
Not available 136 - PZD-11/19 4220 4220 136 -- 0
CU 391 - PZD-3/7 6500 6500
ALM 370 - PZD-1/1 6514
1)
Do not change preassignment.
2)
The axis-specific machine data for the configuration of the setpoints and actual values is pre-assigned using the "Assign
axis" function.

Communication between the NC and the drive
7.2 Configuring the communication to the drive
Default settings
The telegram length in the hardware configuration is preassigned with the associated I/O
addresses. This pre-assignment for SINAMICS corresponds to the following telegrams with the
maximum possible telegram length:
● Telegram 136: for the axes
● Telegram 391: For the CU
● Telegram 370: for the ALM
This ensures that all telegrams can be supplied without change.
Telegram lengths and I/O addresses

Procedure:
1. To view this configuration, click in the HW Config on the module "SINAMICS Integrated" and
select "Object properties", using the <right mouse button>.
2. Select the "Configuration" tab and select the "Overview" tab to display the lengths of the
preassigned telegrams.
The diagram shows the default setting of the telegrams for 6 axes (object 1 ... 6):
3. Click "OK" to close the dialog.

Example
The address areas are displayed in the detail view by clicking the "SINAMICS Integrated"
object. Here, for example, address 4100 corresponds to the address entered in
MD13050 $MN_DRIVE-LOGIC_ADRESS[0]. The addresses have a gap of 40 bytes. The
example shows the assignment of the I/O addresses of the PLC configuration to MD13050
$MN_DRIVE-LOGIC_ADRESS[ 0 … 5]:
Figure 7-1 Telegram lengths and I/O addresses
Default setting in the NC:

MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADRESS[0] = 4100 For the 1st axis
MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADRESS[1] = 4140 For the 2nd axis
MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADRESS[2] = 4180 For the 3rd axis
MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADRESS[3] = 4220 For the 4th axis ... etc.

7.3 Configuring the I/O address and telegram
PROFIBUS connection
The following general machine data is also set by default for the PROFIBUS connection of the
axes to the drive:
● MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS (axis address)
● MD13060 $MN_DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE (telegram type)
● MD13120 $MN_CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS (CU address)
The connection of the relevant axes to the drive via PROFIBUS is displayed in the
"Commissioning" → "Drive system" → "Drive units" → "PROFIBUS" operating area.
Example for the connection of relevant axis to the drive:
Figure 7-2 Drive units - PROFIBUS
To change the assignment, press the "Change >" softkey. Then use the arrow softkeys for the
new assignment:

Figure 7-3 Change assignment
Note
Communication with the drive
To ensure the communication with the drive, the I/O addresses and telegram types set here
must match the settings in the STEP 7 hardware configuration.

7.4 Process data transfer between the NC and drive
Telegram types
Which telegram types are available?
● Standard telegrams
The standard telegrams are structured in accordance with the PROFIdrive Profile V4.1. The
internal process data links are set up automatically in accordance with the telegram number
setting.
● Manufacturer-specific telegrams
The manufacturer-specific telegrams are structured in accordance with internal company
specifications. The internal process data links are set up automatically in accordance with
the telegram number setting.
The telegram length for communication with the drive is specified in the HW Config, and
depends on the required axis functions, e.g. the number of encoders or the functionality of the
deployed drive.
Note
If the telegram length of a drive component is changed in HW Config, the selection of the
telegram type also has to be adapted in the configuration of the interface in the NC.
The following manufacturer-specific telegrams can be set with parameter p0922:
Telegrams for the axes (SERVO):

Torque Torque Position DSC Encoder Encoder Encoder Adapta‐
reduction feedfor‐ controller 1 2 3 tion pa‐
ward con‐ gain rameter
trol
116 x -- x x x x -- --
118 x -- x x x x -- --
136 x x x x x x -- --
146 x x x x x x -- x
138 x x x x -- x x --
148 x x x x -- x x x
139 x x x x x -- -- --
149 x x x x x -- -- x
166 x x x x x x -- --
Telegrams 146, 148, 149 also have an additional control and status word.
Telegrams for the integrated SINAMICS Control Unit (CU_I):

370 Infeed
390 without probe for NX extension
391 up to 2 probes for the NCU
395 16 probes and digital inputs/outputs


The telegrams from the NC to the drive are transferred via the internal PROFIBUS of the NCU:
● Send telegrams (drive → NC)
● Receive telegrams (NC → drive)
The telegrams are standard telegrams with pre-defined assignment of the process data (PZD),
and are interconnected in the drive object using BICO technology.
The following drive objects can exchange process data:
1. Active Line Module (A_INF)
2. Basic Line Module (B_INF)
3. Motor Module (SERVO)
4. Control Unit (CU_I, CU)
The sequence of the drive objects in the telegram on the drive side can be set in parameter
p0978[0...15]: Operating area "Commissioning" → "Machine data" → "Control Unit parameters".
Selecting a telegram via p0922 of the related drive object ("Commissioning" → "Machine data"
→ "Drive parameters" operating area) determines the process data to be transferred.
The receive and send words comprise the following elements:
● Receive words: Control words or setpoints
● Send words: Status words or actual values
Further details are found in the following SINAMICS Manuals:
● SINAMICS S120 Function Manual (FH1) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109763287) in the Section "Communication"
● SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109763271) in the Section "Function block diagrams"

7.5 Drives: Assign axis
Condition
The commissioning of the drives has been completed.
Assigning drive and axis

Procedure:
1. Press the "Drive system" → "Drives" softkeys in the "Commissioning" operating area.
2. With the "Drive +/-" or "Select drive" softkeys, select the drive; in this example,
SERVO_3.3:3 for the spindle.
3. To assign the drive to an axis, press the "Axis assignment >" softkey on the vertical softkey
bar.
4. Mark the uppermost selection box for the "Setpoint: Axis → drive".

5. Mark the next selection box for the "Actual value: Encoder → axis" and assign a measuring
system in accordance with the table below.
6. Select the drive object from "NC drive number": The associated I/O address from the PLC
configuring is then displayed automatically.
7. Click "OK" to confirm the assignment and write the data.
Encoder selection and assignment

The assignment of an axis to a drive is called setpoint assignment; the assignment of an
encoder to an axis is called actual value assignment. The assignments are described below. A
setpoint assignment (axis → drive) without encoder assignment is permitted because not all
axes require encoders, e.g. spindles. The encoders are assigned automatically if they have
already been configured for the drive and are transferred in the telegram.
The tables show which SINAMICS encoders are supported by which telegram:
Message (1 / 2) 3 4 5 6 102 103 104 105

frames
Encoder 1 -- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Encoder 2 -- -- 2 -- 2 -- 2 3 --
Message 106 107 116 118 136/146 138/148 139/149 166

frames
Encoder 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
Encoder 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 -- 2
The numbers in the lines for encoder 1 / encoder 2 indicate the running number of the encoder
on the SINAMICS drive. This number is transferred in the selected telegram to the NC and
assigned to the axis as encoder 1 or encoder 2.
The telegrams in MD13060 $MN_DRIVE_TELEGRAM_TYPE are preassigned with the values
from the HW Config. This preassignment is set correspondingly for the assignment of the drive

to an axis. The following also applies to a setpoint assignment:

MD30130 $MA_CTRLOUT_TYPE[ ] = 1.
Selecting the assignment procedure

Select from the following procedures in the "Assignment Procedure" dialog:
● Via axis machine data (NC drive number)
The NC drive number is retained and written for the selected axis into the following axis
machine data:
MD30110 $MA_CTRL_OUT_MODULE_NR and MD30220 $MA_ENC_MODUL_NR
● Via general machine data (I/O address) = default setting
For this assignment procedure, the I/O address assigned to the drive using the NC drive
number is written to the following general machine
data: MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS[<NC drive number> - 1]. This assumes
that the I/O address default setting is not changed in the PLC project.
● User-defined
If you select this option, the selection list can be edited under "NC drive number". Then
assign a drive number and the displayed I/O address to the axis selected above. This option
is recommended only for experienced machine manufacturers!

7.6 Configuring machine axes
7.6.1 Axis assignment
Introduction
Generally, a distinction is made between four types of axes:
● Machine axes
Machine axes are the motion units existing on a machine, which can also be designated as
linear or rotary axes, depending on their usable movement.
● Channel axes
The total of all machine, geometry and special axes assigned to a channel is designated as
channel axes. In this context, the geometry and special axes constitute the program-
technological part of the machining process, i.e. they are used for programming in the parts
program. The machine axes constitute the physical part of the machining process, i.e. they
carry out the programmed traversing movements on the machine.
● Geometry axes
The geometry axes constitute the rectangular Cartesian basic coordinate system of a
channel. Generally, (Cartesian arrangement of the machine axes) direct imaging of the
geometry axes to the machine axes is possible. If the arrangement of the machine axes,
however, is not Cartesian at right angles, the imaging is performed using a kinematic
transformation.
● Special axes
Special axes are all other channel axes that are not geometry axes. Unlike for geometry
axes (Cartesian coordinate system), no geometric context is defined for special axes,
neither between additional axes nor with respect to geometry axes.
Note
Geometry and special axes
A maximum of three channel axes can be declared as geometry axes. The geometry axes must
be assigned to the channel axes in ascending order without any gaps. All channel axes that are
not geometry axes are special axes.

Axis assignment
The assignment of geometry axes to channel axes and channel axes to machine axes, as well
as the definition of the names of the different axis types is realized via machine data. The
following diagram illustrates this relationship:
1&8 *HRPHWU\D[LVQDPHV &KDQQHOD[HVXVHG

0'0&B$;&21)B*(2$;B1$0(B7$%>Q@>P@ 0'0&B$;&21)B*(2$;B$66,*1B7$%>Q@>P@
&KDQQHO &KDQQHOQ
Q
&KDQQHO &KDQQHO
VWJHRPHWU\D[LV >@ ಯ;ರ VWJHRPHWU\D[LV >@
QGJHRPHWU\D[LV >@ ಯ<ರ QGJHRPHWU\D[LV >@
UGJHRPHWU\D[LV >@ ಯ=ರ UGJHRPHWU\D[LV >@
&KDQQHOD[LVQDPHV 0DFKLQHD[HVXVHG
0'0&B$;&21)B&+$1$;B1$0(B7$%>Q@>P@ 0'0&B$;&21)B0$&+$;B86('>Q@>P@
&KDQQHOQ &KDQQHOQ
&KDQQHO &KDQQHO
VWFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ;ರ VWFKDQQHOD[LV >@
QGFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ<ರ QGFKDQQHOD[LV >@
UGFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ=ರ UGFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ$ರ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ%ರ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ8ರ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯ9ರ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ಯರ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@

/RJLFDOPDFKLQHD[LVLPDJH
0'01B$;&21)B/2*,&B0$&+$;B7$%>Q@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
ಯ1&B$;Qರ
ಯ&7B6/ರ
ಯ$;ರ ಯ$;ರ ಯ$;ರ ಯ$;ರ ಯ$;ರ ಯ$;ರ
$[LVFRQWDLQHUQDPHV
0'
01B$;&7B1$0(B7$%>Q@
/RFDOPDFKLQHD[HV
0' $[LVFRQWDLQHUಯ&7ರ >@ ಯ&7ರ
01B$;&21)B0$&+$;B1$0(B7$%>Q@ 0'01B$;&7B$;&21)B$66,*1B7$% >@ ಯ&7ರ
VWPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ 1&B$; 6ORW >@ ಯ&7ರ
QGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ >@ ಯ&7ರ
UGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ 1&B$; 6ORW
>@ ಯ&7ರ
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ 1&B$; 6ORW >@ ಯ&7ರ
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯ$;ರ >@ ಯ&7ರ
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯರ 1&B$; 6ORW
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ ಯರ

1&QB$;P&RQWDLQHUOLQND[LV
/LQND[LV0DFKLQHD[LV$;QRQ1&8
Figure 7-4 Axis assignment

Channel axis gaps

Normally, using MD20070, a channel axis is assigned to one machine axis. Not every channel
axis must be assigned to a machine axis. Each channel axis with MD20070 [n] = 0 is not
assigned any machine axis and represents a channel axis gap.
Channel axis gaps allow the creation of a uniform configuration of the channel axes over
different machine versions of a series. Each channel axis of the series has a defined task or
function. If the function and therefore the machine axis is not available on a specific machine,
the relevant channel axis is not assigned a machine axis:
MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[<channel axis>] = 0
Advantages:
● Commissioning archive with uniform basic configuration
● Simple post configuration for the specific machine
● Flexible portability of part programs
Enabling channel axis gaps

The use of channel axis gaps is enabled using the machine data:
MD11640 $MN_ENABLE_CHAN_AX_GAP = 1 (channel axis gap allowed).
If the use of channel axis gaps has not been enabled, then the value 0 for channel axis n in the
following machine data terminates the allocation of additional machine axes to possible
channel axes from channel axis n onwards:
MD20070 $MC_AXCONF_MACHAX_USED[<channel axis n>]
Supplementary conditions:
● Regarding the number of channel axes and the indexing, a channel axis gap counts just the
same as axes.
● Ensure that a geometry axis is not assigned to a channel axis, that is not assigned to a
machine axis (channel axis gap). No alarm is displayed.
● Transformation: When configuring a channel axis in the following machine data, which is not
assigned a machine axis (channel axis gap), an alarm is output:
– MD24110 ff. $MC_TRAFO_AXES_IN1...8
– MD24120 ff. $MC_TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB1...8
Example
The 5th channel axis "B" in MD20070 is not assigned to a machine axis.
If channel axis gaps are enabled, six machine axes (1 - 4, 5, 6) are available.
If channel axis gaps are not enabled, then there are four machine axes (1 - 4) available.

&KDQQHOD[LVQDPHV 0DFKLQHD[HVXVHG
0'0&B$;&21)B&+$1$;B1$0(B7$%>Q@>P@ 0'0&B$;&21)B0$&+$;B86('>Q@>P@
1&8 &KDQQHOQ &KDQQHOQ
&KDQQHO &KDQQHO
VWFKDQQHOD[LV >@ ; VWFKDQQHOD[LV >@
QGFKDQQHOD[LV >@ < QGFKDQQHOD[LV >@
UGFKDQQHOD[LV >@ = UGFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ $ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ % &KDQQHOD[LVJDS WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ 8 WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ 9 WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@
WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@ WKFKDQQHOD[LV >@

Figure 7-5 Axis configuration with channel axis gap
7.6.2 Axis names
Machine axes
Each machine axis, channel axis and geometry axis is assigned an individual name that clearly
identifies the axis. Machine axis names must be unambiguous for the entire NC. The name of
the machine axes are defined via the following machine date:
MD10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB [n] (machine axis name)
The specified names and the associated index are used in the following cases:
● Accessing axis-specific machine data (loading, saving, displaying)
● Reference point approach from the parts program G74
● Measuring
● Test point traversing from the parts program G75
● Traversing the machine axis from the PLC
● Display of axis-specific alarms
● Display in the actual-value system (machine-related)
● DRF handwheel function
Channel axes
The name of the channel axes are defined via the following machine date:
MD20080 $MC_AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[n] (name of the channel axis in the channel)
Channel axis names must be unambiguous for the entire channel.
Geometry axes
The names of the geometry axes must be absolutely unique throughout the channel, and are
defined using the following machine data:

MD20060 $MC_AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB [n] (geometry axis in the channel)

The names for channel and geometry axes are used in the part program for programming
general traversing movements and to describe the workpiece contour.
● Path axes
● Synchronized axes
● Positioning axes
● Command axes
● Spindles
● Gantry axes
● Coupled axes
● Guide value coupling axes
7.6.3 Drive assignment
Drive assignment
The assignment of machine axes to the SERVO drive objects is realized using machine data.
/RFDOPDFKLQHD[HV
0'01B$;&21)B0$&+$;B1$0(B7$%>Q@
VWPDFKLQHD[LV >@ $;

QGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ $;
UGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ $;
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ $;
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ $;

$FWXDOVHWSRLQWFKDQQHORIWKHPDFKLQHD[HV
0'0$B&75/287B02'8/(B15>@>Q@ ,2DGGUHVVHVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFWV
0'0$B(1&B02'8/(B15>@>Q@ 0'01B'5,9(B/2*,&B$''5(66>Q@
VWPDFKLQHD[LV >@ >@ ,2DGGUHVVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFW

QGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ >@ ,2DGGUHVVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFW
UGPDFKLQHD[LV >@ >@ ,2DGGUHVVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFW
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ >@ ,2DGGUHVVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFW
WKPDFKLQHD[LV >@ >@ ,2DGGUHVVRIWKH6(592GULYHREMHFW

Figure 7-6 Drive assignment

Assignment:
1. Using this machine data, the NC is informed about the I/O addresses of the SERVO drive
objects defined in the PLC project:
MD13050 $MN_DRIVE_LOGIC_ADDRESS[n]
2. Using the following machine data, the setpoint and actual values of the machine axes are
assigned to the relevant drive objects:
– MD30110 $MA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR[0]
– MD30220 $MA_ENC_MODULE_NR[0]
The logical drive number m to be entered into both machine data, refers to the I/O address
entered in ① under index n = (m - 1).
3. Using machine data MD10000 $MN_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB, the machine axes
in the NC are assigned a unique name. Index n addresses machine axis (n+1).

NC commissioning 8
8.1 Machine and setting data
Setting machine data

Adaptation of the control at the machine is performed using the machine and setting data.
● The machine data (MD) is divided into the following areas:
– General machine data
– Channel-specific machine data
– Axis-specific machine data
– Parameters for the Control Unit
– Parameter for the infeed
– Drive parameters
● The setting data (SD) is divided into the following areas:
– General setting data
– Channel-specific setting data
– Axis-specific setting data
The following table provides an overview of the machine data and setting data areas:
Range Name
from 9000 to 9999 Display machine data
from 10000 to 18999 General NC machine data
from 19000 to 19999 Reserved
from 20000 to 28999 Channel-specific machine data
from 30000 to 38999 Axis-specific machine data
from 41000 to 41999 General setting data
from 42000 to 42999 Channel-specific setting data
from 43000 to 43999 Axis-specific setting data
from 51000 to 51299 General configuration machine data
from 51300 to 51999 General cycle machine data
from 52000 to 52299 Channel-specific configuration machine data
from 52300 to 52999 Channel-specific cycle machine data
from 53000 to 53299 Axis-specific configuration machine data
from 53300 to 53999 Axis-specific cycle machine data

NC commissioning
8.1 Machine and setting data
The SINUMERIK Operate Online Help provides a context-related description of the

machine data and setting data.
Effectiveness
The effectiveness of a machine data item specifies when the change becomes active:
po The changed machine data require an "NCK Reset" to become effective.

re The changed machine data must be activated by pressing the <RESET> key.
cf The changed machine data must be activated by pressing the "Apply MD" softkey.
so The changed machine data becomes active immediately.
Changes to the setting data always take effect immediately.
References
You can find a description of the machine data and setting data in the SINUMERIK 840D sl list
manual Machine Data and Parameters (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/
109763238)

NC commissioning
8.2 Procedure when commissioning the NC
NC commissioning
We recommend the following sequence when commissioning the NC:
Sequence Reference
① Parameter sets of axis/spindle ● Velocities, setpoint/actual-value systems, closed-loop
control (G2)
● Spindles (S1)
② Axis configuration ● Axes, coordinate systems, frames (K2)
● Synchronous spindles (S3)
● Rotary axes (R2)
● Compensations (K3)
③ Parameterizing axis data: Velocities, setpoint/actual-value systems, closed-loop control
● Parameterizing the incremental-rotary measuring system (G2)
● Parameterizing the incremental-linear measuring system ● Setpoint/actual-value system → Actual-value resolution
● Parameterizing the absolute measuring system ● Setpoint/actual-value system → Actual-value resolution
● Setpoint/actual-value channels ● Setpoint/actual-value system → Actual-value resolution
● Dynamic Stiffness Control (DSC) ● Setpoint/actual-value system
● Rotary axes ● Tuning of the control
● Positioning axes ● Rotary axes → (R2)
● Position controller ● Positioning axes → (P2)
● Speed setpoint matching ● Closed-loop control

● Axis velocity matching ● Closed-loop control
● Axis monitoring functions (static) ● Velocities
● Axis monitoring functions (dynamic) ● Axis monitoring, protection areas → (A3)

● Axis monitoring, protection areas → (A3)
④ Parameterizing the spindle data: Spindles (S1)
● Setpoint/actual-value channels ● Setpoint/actual-value system → (G2)
● Measuring systems ● Setpoint/actual-value system → (G2)
● Gear stages ● Gear stages for spindles and gear change change
● Velocities and setpoint adaptation ● Gear stages for spindles and gear change change
● Spindle positioning ● Spindle modes > Axis mode
● Spindle synchronization ● Reference / synchronize
● Monitoring ● Spindle monitoring
⑤ Referencing axis/spindle: Reference point approach (R1)
● Incremental measuring system ● Referencing with incremental measurement systems
● Distance-coded reference marks ● Referencing with distance-coded reference marks
● Absolute encoder homing ● Referencing with absolute encoders
/FB1/: A2, A3, G2, K2, R1, S1 in the Basic Functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/
de/en/view/109763231)Function Manual
/FB2/: K3, P2, S3 in the Extended Functions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/
view/109763228) Function Manual

NC commissioning
Setting the technology

User views are lists of machine data and setting data that are compiled for a special application.
In order to set all the technology-relevant data for a turning machine or milling machine on the
control, the following user views are available to facilitate the commissioning:
● Setup_Milling
● Setup_Turning
The files are stored on the CompactFlash card under:

/user/sinumerik/hmi/template/user_views/param
Product announcement (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/document/
80582059)

NC commissioning
8.3 Memory configuration
8.3 Memory configuration
Requirement
A dialog is provided in the "Commissioning" → "NC" → "NC memory" operating area which
supports you when partitioning the NC memory. The "Service" access level is required for this.
Memory division
The memory-configuring NC machine data is divided into various function areas, such as tool
management‚ user data‚ zero offsets and memory types. The graphic with the following legend
shows the division of the individual data areas:
The following memory expansions are available as licensed software option:

● Additional 2 MB CNC user memory (6FC5800-0AD00-0YB0)
● Additional PLC user memory (6FC5800-0AD10-0YB0)
● Execution from external storage (EES) (6FC5800-0AN75-0YB0)
● Expanded CNC user memory (6FC5800-0AN77-0YB0)
● Additional user memory on the CompactFlash card of the NCU (6FC5800-0AP12-0YB0)

NC commissioning
8.4 Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics
Conditions
Only those axes are listed for friction compensation for which MD32490 = 3 or 4 is set.
Machine data Meaning

MD32500 $MA_FRICT_COMP_ENABLE = 1 Enable friction compensation for this axis
Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics:
MD32490 $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE = 3 Injection time depends on the velocity setpoint
MD32490 $MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE = 4 Injection time depends on the position controller
output
Software option
In order to use this function a license is required for the following option:
"Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics" (6FC5800-0_S06-0YB0)
Call the function at the control in the "Commissioning" → softkey "Friction compensation"
operating area: The softkey is not shown until the option has been set.
Backing up tuning results

When tuning, the axis machine data are changed as follows during the measuring series:
● When a measurement series is started, the friction compensation values in the axis machine
data are reset.
● When the measurement series is exited, the new friction compensation values are written
to the axis machine data and backed up.
● When the measurement series is canceled, the previous friction compensation values are
restored in the machine data.
NOTICE
Backing up tuning results
If the power fails during the tuning process, tuning result data can be lost.
⇒ SINUMERIK 840D sl: In order to avoid that tuning results are lost, it is recommended that
you create a commissioning archive with NC data that contains the axis machine data of the
last complete measurement series. You do not have to select the "With compensation data"
option.
⇒ SINUMERIK 828D: In order to avoid that tuning results are lost, it is recommended that you
create a data class archive of the type "INDIVIDUAL" that contains the friction compensation
data of the last complete measurement series.

NC commissioning
References
For more information, please refer to the "Compensations" Chapter in the Extended Functions
(K3) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763228) Function Manual
8.4.1 Axis selection and status display
What is displayed in this dialog?

In the dialog "Axis selection for automatic tuning", for each channel, select the axes for
automatic friction compensation.
Automatic tuning:
Before starting automatic tuning:
For Automatic tuning, in a channel, select several axes that should be automatically tuned one
after the other. The automatic tuning for the selected axes is started for each channel.
Status display:
The following status data is displayed while tuning:
● "waits" for the selected axes, where tuning has still not been started.
● "being tuned" for the axis that is presently being tuned.
● "tuned" for axes, where tuning has already been successfully completed and saved.
Note
Time required (radius, feedrates)
The time required for the automatic tuning is obtained from the selected feedrates and the
radius: Align the feedrates in the channel setting data (Page 238) for the tuning of the axes to
the machining velocities of the machine.
After completing automatic tuning:

To visualize the measurement results, for the automatic tuning process, after each step, the
tuning result is saved as screenshot under the following path: ../user/sinumerik/hmi/data/cst
When tuning an axis, the resolution for the screenshots is the same for all feedrates, and is not
selected less than 1 μm.
After completing tuning of an axis in the channel, the compensation values are written to the
axis machine data and the status display updated.
Tuning quality:
The displayed maximum deviation can vary when repeating the tuning process at the same
axis. If, after measurement, the deviation for a feedrate has not improved when compared to
the initial state, compensation values are not written to the axis machine data.

NC commissioning
Commissioning archive:
The tuning results in the axis machine data and also the tuning status of the axes are backed
up in the "NC data" commissioning archive. If the commissioning archive with the tuning data
from machine A is read into machine B, then the NC data are completely read in.
● The axis machine data is read in and becomes effective.
● The axis tuning status is read in. Only when selecting the "Friction compensation" dialog, as
a result of the different serial numbers of the system CompactFlash card, you will be
prompted to accept or reject the tuning status.
General conditions for the commissioning sequence:

● For a feed override not equal to 100 %, the selected axis traverses with the reduced feed.
The tuning (automatic and manual) is held, and the circular representation is suppressed
until the feed override has been again set to 100%.
● The computational resolution in MD10200 $MN_INT_INCR_PER_MM and
MD10210 $MN_INT_INCR_PER_DEG must be at least 10000.
● Tuning is not started if, for the selected axes, the following machine data cannot have a
value of 0:
MD32450 $MA_BACKLASH
MD32456 $MA_BACKLASH_DYN
MD32572 $MA_FRICT_V_PULSE_DELAY_TIME
MD32575 $MA_FRICT_V_PULSE_SMOOTH_TIME
MD32578 $MA_FRICT_T_PULSE_SMOOTH_TIME
MD32579 $MA_FRICT_PRETRIGGER_TIME
Manual tuning:
To start manual tuning press the "Manual tuning" softkey. In the next dialog, select the axes
that you wish to tune.
After completing tuning for an axis in the channel, the compensation values are written to the
axis machine data and the status display updated.
⇒ Further actions:
● "Start" softkey to start automatic friction compensation.
● "Manual tuning >" softkey, to start friction compensation with manual input of the
compensation values.
● "OK" softkey to confirm your selection.
● "Cancel" softkey to cancel the selection.
8.4.2 Friction compensation - automatic tuning
Operation on the SINUMERIK Operate

The axes selected in the particular channel are automatically traversed individually one after
the other.

NC commissioning
Procedure:
1. The radius and the feedrate for the measurements are preset in the following channel
setting data and apply for all axes in the channel.
Designation Unit Machine data

Radius (linear axis) mm SD55820 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS
Radius (rotary axis) ° (degrees) SD55821 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS_ROT
Feedrate (linear axis) [mm/min] SD55822 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED[0...8]
Feedrate (rotary axis) [°/min] SD55823 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED_ROT[0...8]
2. Press the "Start" softkey to start measurements. A part program is then automatically
generated; this is done by calling CYCLE790 which reverses the axis with the preset
feedrate. Before the part program is started, a check is made as to whether the entered
feedrates can be achieved based on the dynamic response of the axis. If feedrates are
selected to be too high, a message is output that the feedrates should be reduced.
3. If the entered feedrates have been successfully tested and found to be OK, the part program
is opened in order to add additional program instructions. Confirm with "OK" to close the
window and continue.
On completion of the tuning of an axis in the channel, the compensation values are saved in the
axis machine data and the status display is updated. The next axis is then automatically tuned
in this channel.
Note
Gantry axis grouping
For a gantry axis grouping, only the guide axis is displayed. On completion of the tuning, the
compensation values of the guide axis are copied to the synchronous axes.
● "Start" softkey to start tuning.
● "Graphic" softkey to change to the graphic display.
● "Data list" softkey to switch to the list of axis machine data and channel setting data.
● "Cancel" softkey to cancel tuning.
8.4.3 Friction compensation - manual tuning
Operation on the SINUMERIK Operate

With this function, you can optionally traverse one or two axes. The measurement is graphically
displayed as circle diagram. The values entered for the friction compensation only apply to the
axis which is selected in the header line.
The scaling in the graphic display is adapted automatically as long as a scaling value is not
entered manually. Up to nine measurements with different feedrates can be performed in one
pass. With 1-axis and 2-axis traversing, the upper and the lower reversal points are relevant for

NC commissioning
tuning. The measurement consists of an initialization phase and the actual measuring process.
The current status is displayed at the bottom right in the status line via a progress indicator.
Procedure:
1. Press the "Axis +" or "Axis -" softkey to select the axis for which you activated friction
compensation.
The radius, the feedrate and the direction of rotation for the measurements are preset in the
following channel setting data and apply for all axes in the channel. They can be adapted by
pressing the "Data list" softkey:

Radius (linear axis) mm SD55820 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS
Radius (rotary axis) ° (degrees) SD55821 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS_ROT
Feedrate (linear axis) [mm/min] SD55822 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED[0...8]
Feedrate (rotary axis) [°/min] SD55823 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED_ROT[0...8]
Direction of rotation (only ac‐ --- SD55828 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_DIR
tive for two axes)
2. To start the measurement, press the "Start" softkey. A part program is then automatically
generated and selected by the NC; this is done by calling CYCLE790 which reverses the
axis with the preset feedrate.
Before the part program is started, a check is made as to whether the entered feedrates can
be achieved based on the dynamic response of the axis. If this is not the case, a message
is issued to reduce the feedrates.
3. The part program for the measurement series is then opened if you want to add further
commands. Confirm with "OK" to close the window and continue.
4. Press the NC Start key to start tuning.

NC commissioning
5. The first step with the first feedrate of the measurement series is selected. Enter the friction
compensation values in the following entry fields:
Input field Unit Machine data

Amplitude [mm/min] MD32571 $MA_FRICT_VELO_STEP
or [°/min]
Decay time [s] MD32574 $MA_FRICT_V_PULSE_DECAY_TIME
Active time [s] MD32573 $MA_FRICT_V_PULSE_CONST_TIME
0$B)5,&7B9B38/6(B&2167B7,0(
0$B)5,&7B9(/2B67(3

7LPHW>V@
0$B)5,&7B9B38/6(B'(&$<B7,0(
For both traversing directions, as default setting, the same compensation values are
entered. By selecting the option "Set reversal points separately", you can enter different
compensation values for an axis, depending on the particular traversing direction.
6. Press the "Next step" softkey to start a new measurement with the next feedrate and enter
new values. If the measurement is repeated, the values appropriate for the feedrate from the
last measurement are proposed.
After the last step, the measuring series is terminated with "OK" and the data is saved.
Note
Incremental value change
Use the following shortcut keys to change the compensation values incrementally:
● The selected entry field is activated with the <INSERT> key, and the color changes.
● The values are changed with different increments with the <Page Up> / <Page Down> keys
and the ↑↓ cursor keys.
● End the input with the <INPUT> key.
● "Axis +" or "Axis -" softkey to select the axis for which the friction compensation is activated.
● "Start" softkey to start the measurement.
● "Next step" softkey to select the next feedrate.

NC commissioning
● "Previous step" softkey to return to the previous feedrate.

● "Data list" softkey to switch to the list of machine data.
● "Cancel" softkey to cancel the recording and reject the entries.
● "OK" softkey to accept the values determined during the friction compensation.
8.4.4 Data list

In the data list, axis machine data and channel setting data are displayed, which are relevant
for "Friction compensation with adaptive characteristics".
The values can be modified before the start. Changes cannot be made while tuning.
To start tuning with fewer than nine steps, overwrite the feedrates that are not required in the
channel setting data MD55822 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED and
MD55823 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED_ROT with zero without any gaps. If, after a feedrate = 0,
a value ≠ 0 is found, then the procedure is canceled.
The following also applies: MD55822[0] ≠ 0 and MD55823[0] ≠ 0
Softkey "<<" to return to the "Friction compensation" dialog.
8.4.5 Example for a linear axis (automatic tuning)
Requirement
The machine data for activating the friction compensation is set for the Y axis:
● MD32490 = 3
● MD32510 = 1
The Y axis is measured with the following settings:
● Radius 5 mm in SD55820 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS
● Feedrates in SD55822[n] $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED
● The active time is not adapted.
Result of the Y axis
Step 1 of 8: 700 mm/min Amplitude: 68.696 mm/min

Decay time: 0.017 s
Decay time: 0.017 s
Decay time: 0.021 s

NC commissioning

Decay time: 0.038 s
Decay time: 0.015 s
Decay time: 0.014 s
Decay time: 0.012 s
Decay time: 0.009 s
The following characteristics show the amplitude and the decay time for different acceleration
levels:
&RPSHQVDWLRQYDOXH>PPPLQ@

$FFHOHUDWLRQ>PVt@

NC commissioning
'HFD\WLPH>V@

$FFHOHUDWLRQ>PVt@
8.4.6 Friction compensation with torque injection pulse
Parameterizing machine data

The following axis machine data must be parameterized in order to use an acceleration-
dependent torque injection pulse also for friction compensation:

Acceleration-dependent amplitude of the --- MD32576 $MA_FRICT_TORQUE_STEP
torque injection pulse
Delay time of the torque injection pulse [s] MD32577 $MA_FRICT_T_PULSE_DE‐
LAY_TIME
Ramp-up time of the torque injection pulse [s] MD32578
$MA_FRICT_T_PULSE_SMOOTH_TIME
Weighting factor for the amplitude of the --- MD32588 $MA_FRICT_T_STEP[0...9]
torque injection pulse

NC commissioning
0$B)5,&7B72548(B67(3

7LPHW>V@
0$B)5,&7B7B38/6(B60227+B7,0(
Enter a factor between -1.0 and 1.0 in MD32588 $MA_FRICT_T_STEP[0...9] for each
acceleration value in order to weight the amplitude of the torque injection pulse.

NC commissioning
8.5 Nodding compensation
8.5.1 Measuring technique and machine data
Benefits
The nodding compensation enhances precision for machining of the workpiece by
compensating for compliance within the machine and is beneficial for traveling column
machines, for example, in that it improves machining accuracy and surface quality.
Software option
You need licenses for the following options in order to use this function:
● To tune a machine axis with a compensation relationship and position-
dependent adaptation:
"Nodding compensation ECO" (6FC5800-0_S20-0YB0)
● For the optimization of more than one compensation relationship:
"Nodding compensation ADVANCED" (6FC5800-0_S21-0YB0)
Call the function at the control in the "Commissioning" → softkey "NC" → softkey "Nodding
compensation" operating area. The softkey is not shown until the option has been set.
Example
Nodding motion in the Z axis when accelerating in the X axis:
Definition of compliance
From the acceleration or deceleration of an axis as the cause for nodding - and the deviation
of an axis as compliance at the position - a factor can be determined, which describes the
interrelationship between the accelerating or decelerating axis motion, and the position
deviation in the compensated axis. No mass is included in the calculation. The compliance
factor is the inverse value of the stiffness.

NC commissioning
Measuring technique
There are two techniques that can be selected for determining compliance:
● Milling standardized workpiece and selecting the optimum milling path
For a standardized workpiece, a cycle is available to mill several milling paths with different
compliance factors. The compliance factor can be empirically determined based on the
workpiece surface quality.
For the cycle settings, you can also select face milling for the workpiece in order to carry out
several tests with different compliance factors on one workpiece.
● Determining positional deviations using a probe
The position deviation is precisely measured at different positions. Based on this, the
compliance factor can be calculated once the acceleration or deceleration that has been
achieved is known.
Machine data
Axis machine data for nodding compensation:
Number Name Effect Unit

MD37302 $MA_NOCO_FILTER_TIME Time constant for smoothing nodding [s]
compensation values
MD37310 $MA_NOCO_INPUT_AX_1 Machine axis, which causes nodding [1...31]
MD37320 $MA_NOCO_INPUT_AX_2 motion
MD37330 $MA_NOCO_INPUT_AX_3
MD37312 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_AX_1 Machine axis, whose position influen‐ [1...31]
MD37322 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_AX_2 ces nodding motion
MD37332 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_AX_3
MD37314 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_NUM_AX_1 Number of positions of the adaptation [1...3]
MD37324 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_NUM_AX_2 characteristic of nodding compensation
MD37334 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_NUM_AX_3
MD37316 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_POS_AX_1 Positions of the adaptation characteris‐ [mm]
MD37326 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_POS_AX_2 tic of nodding compensation
MD37336 $MA_NOCO_ADAPT_POS_AX_3
MD37318 $MA_NOCO_COMPLIANCE_1 Nodding compensation compliance fac‐ [s2]
MD37328 $MA_NOCO_COMPLIANCE_2 tor
MD37338 $MA_NOCO_COMPLIANCE_3
For more information, please refer to the "Compensations" section in the Extended Functions
(K3) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763228) Function Manual

NC commissioning
8.5.2 Nodding compensation - overview
What is displayed in this dialog?

A summary of the following data is provided in the "Nodding compensation" overview:
● Accelerating axis: Axis, which results in nodding motion.
● Compensated axis: Machine axis, whose nodding motion is compensated.
● Adaptation axis: Machine axis, whose position influences nodding motion.
● Position [mm] on the adaptation axis
● Factor for compliance [μm / m/s2]
Supplementary conditions:
● Inadmissible entries are color-coded in the table in the "Nodding compensation - overview"
dialog. An explanation is output in the message line below the table.
● A rotary axis is not permissible as accelerating axis, compensated axis or adaptation axis.
● For a gantry axis grouping, only the guide axis is listed. On completion of the tuning, a query
is made whether the compensation values of the guide axis are copied to the synchronous
axes.
● In order that the "Nodding compensation" function may also be used for rotary axes, the
following option is required: RMCC/NOCO nodding compensation
(6FC5800-0AN63-0YB0).. This option is not part of this description - and is not displayed in
this dialog.
⇒ additional actions:
● "New" softkey to create a new compensation:
– Mill test part
– Enter manually
● Softkey "Change", to change the compliance and position dependency of the axes involved.
● Softkey Deactivate/activate, to deactivate existing compensation relationships and
reactivate them again.
● "Delete" softkey, to delete all values in the machine data of this compensation relationship:

NC commissioning
Activating/deactivating nodding compensation

To analyze the effect of the nodding compensation on the machining, you can deactivate
individual or all compensation relationships without deleting the original parameterization.
Deactivation is useful for the following applications:
● Diagnostics and problem analysis:
The effect of a specific compensation relationship on the workpiece surface should be
tested. Because a superimposition of compensation relationships from different axes and
different compensation relationships is possible, the effect of an individual or all successive
compensation relationships should be tested. For this purpose, the compensation is
deactivated temporarily; the determined compliance values are retained.
● Series commissioning:
The compensation values are loaded via the series commissioning archive and can be
deactivated during the machine tuning, to tune the machine without the effect of the nodding
compensation. On completion of the tuning, the compensation values are reactivated. As
check, a test part can be milled.
Procedure:
1. In the "Nodding compensation - Overview" select the "Deactivate/activate" softkey to
deactivate the compensation relationships.
2. Select the individual compensation relationships or select the "Deactivate all" softkey.
3. The "Back" softkey returns you to the "Nodding compensation - Overview".
4. If the nodding compensation should act again, reset the deactivated compensation
relationships to the "active" status.
The compensation relationships are deactivated bit-by-bit in MD37300 $MA_NOCO_ENABLE.
8.5.3 Determining compliance from the best milling path
Measuring technique: Best milling path

For a standardized workpiece, a cycle is available to mill several milling paths with different
compliance factors. The necessary compliance factor can be empirically determined based on
the surface quality of the milled workpiece.
Note
Active transformation
In order to guarantee a fault-free cycle sequence, active transformations are to be deactivated
before starting the cycle.

NC commissioning
For the cycle settings, you can also select face milling for the workpiece in order to carry out
several tests with different compliance factors on one workpiece.
Accelerating axis: Geometry axes X, Y, Z

Compensated axis: Machining plane G17: Z axis
Type of machining: [no] path milling only
[yes] face milling and path milling
Parameter Meaning Unit

RP Retraction plane [abs] [mm]
SC Safety clearance [inc] [mm]
F Path milling feedrate [mm/min]
FA Face milling feedrate [mm/min]
X0 Corner point 1 X [abs] [mm]
Y0 Corner point 1 Y [abs] [mm]
Z0 Height of blank [abs] [mm]
X1 Corner point 2 in relation to X0 [inc.] [mm]
Y1 Corner point 2 in relation to Y0 [inc.] [mm]
Z1 Feed depth for face milling in relation to Z0 [inc.] [mm]
Z2 without face milling: Feed depth for path milling in relation to [mm]
Z0 (inc.)
with face milling: Feed depth for path milling in relation to Z1
(inc.)
N Number of milling paths ---
Minimum value of the compliance factor [μm / m/s2]
Maximum value of the compliance factor [μm / m/s2]
Compliance factor of the best milling path [μm / m/s2]
Note
Test run before machining
To perform a test run before machining, enter a suitable value for the infeed depth.
8.5.4 Nodding compensation - manually enter
Entering compensation data

For the manual input of the compliance factor, all degrees of freedom in the compensation
relationships between accelerating and compensated axes are possible. Further, position-
dependent adaptation values can be entered at the user interface.

NC commissioning
Procedure without adaptation:

1. Select first the accelerating axis and then the compensated axis. This can also be the same
axis.
2. If no position dependency exists, then accept the default setting "No".
3. Enter the compliance factor.
Procedure with adaptation:
1. Select first the accelerating axis and then the compensated axis. This can also be the same
axis.
2. If a position dependency exists, select "Yes" and then the adaption axis.
3. Then enter the number of interpolation points and the respective compliance factor for each
interpolation point.
In this dialog you can subsequently change the compliance and the position dependency for the
configured axes.
8.5.5 Determining compliance using a probe
Preconditions
If not yet already available, create a commissioning archive with the drive data and connect the
probe to a free DRIVE-CLiQ interface (Page 193). Only linear measuring systems are permitted
as probes.
NOTICE
Deactivate Safety Integrated temporarily
If axes still have Safety Integrated activated, a message is displayed to inform you that Safety
Integrated must be deactivated in order to configure the probe.
Following configuration of the probe, Safety Integrated must be activated once again.
Initiating trace recording

Procedure:
1. Select "Trace: Yes" to determine the compliance factor of the selected axis using a probe.
2. Select the measuring system for the encoder position actual value:
⇒ Select the drive to which the probe is connected, for example SERVO_3.3:6
⇒ Select an encoder, for example "Encoder 3".

NC commissioning
3. Create a part program which comprises the following components:

– Trigger tag $AN_CUTRACE
– Dwell time of at least 200 ms in order that the offset of the probe can be taken into
consideration in the graphic representation.
– Traversing with constant velocity.
– The accelerating axis is accelerated to at least 1 m/s2.
Example:
SOFT ; acceleration with active jerk limitation

DYNNORM ; G command for activating the normal dynamic
response
$AN_CUTRACE=1 ; trigger tag
G4 F0.2 ; Dwell time
G91 G01 F20000 Y-50 ; relative traversing motion with programmed
feed
Y50 ; traversing motion
M30 ; End of program
4. Initiate the trace recording with the "Start trace" softkey. Then initiate the part program with
<NC-Start>.
Note
Starting the trace
Once trace recording has been initiated by the trigger in the part program, it is no longer
possible to cancel the recording process.
5. As soon as recording is complete, the following data is displayed in a graphic representation:

– Encoder position actual value (p0479) of the probe
– Acceleration of the accelerating axis
6. Enter the compliance factor (positional deviation/acceleration) and repeat the
measurement. To clarify the effect of the compliance factor against the first measurement,
scaling of the graphic following the first measurement is retained.
7. Once you have determined the optimum compliance factor for the axis, rescaling of the
graphic can be performed with the "Rescale" softkey.
8. As soon as the compliance factor is changed, the measurement must be repeated for
verification. Only then will the "Accept" softkey become active.
● "Start trace" softkey to initiate recording of the trace.
● "Rescale" softkey to automatically scale the graphic.
● "Cancel" softkey to return to the overview display without any modifications.
● "Accept" softkey to adopt the new compliance values.

NC commissioning
8.5.6 Example: Traveling column machine
Before tuning
The nodding motion of the Z axis when traversing in the Y direction is measured with a probe:

NC commissioning
After tuning
Measurement with a compliance value of 20 μm:

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
8.6 Adaptations
8.6.1 Intelligent load adjustment – function
Benefits
The "Intelligent load adjustment" function is used to optimize the following characteristics of a
machine tool by adapting dynamic response and control parameters:
● Shorter machining times
● Increased dynamic response
● Greater accuracy
● Enhanced precision
The machine manufacturer is supported in the commissioning of the function by dialogs on the
user interface: "Commissioning" → softkey "NC" → Menu forward key → softkey"Adaptations"
operating area. The softkey is not shown until the option has been set.
Condition
Software option
"Intelligent load adjustment" (6FC5800-0_S11-0YB0)
Function description
The"Intelligent load adjustment" function adjusts the dynamic response and control parameters
to the current value of the moment of inertia or the mass of the axis. Adaptations are switched
on and off by means of CYCLE782.
The following dynamic response and control parameters can be adapted:
● Acceleration: DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH, DYNPREC
● Jerk: DYNNORM, DYNPOS, DYNROUGH, DYSEMIFIN, DYNFINISH, DYNPREC
● Servo gain factor (position controller gain)

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
● Torque feedforward control

● Drive adaptation factor 1 ... 4: A maximum of 4 drive variables from parameter p2782[0...3]
"Mode adaptation" can be adapted.
– Kp speed controller P gain adaptation speed
– Tn speed controller integral time adaptation speed
– Current setpoint filter 1 denominator and numerator
– Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator and numerator
– Speed controller reference model natural frequency and damping
– APC / APC ECO Tv (p3769)
– APC / APC ECO filter (p3766)
Example:
For a rotary table with highly variable loading, the effective acceleration (DYNNORM) should
be adapted to the current moment of inertia. The "Intelligent load adjustment" function is used
to increase acceleration (DYNNORM) at minimal loading to 150%.
$FFHOHUDWLRQ '<11250
>@

ZLWKDGDSWDWLRQ

ZLWKRXWDGDSWDWLRQ
-PLQ -PD[
0RPHQWRILQHUWLD>NJP@
Jmin ⇒ MD16506[0] $MN_CADAPT_INPUT_VALUE_1

Jmax ⇒ MD16507[0] $MN_CADAPT_INPUT_VALUE_2
150% ⇒ MD16508[0] $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT_VALUE_1
100% ⇒ MD16509[0] $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT_VALUE_2

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
Supplementary conditions
Please note the following supplementary conditions:
● The "Moment of inertia estimator" function module (bit r0108.30) can be used to determine
the moment of inertia of the axis (Example).
● For the adaptation of the drive adaptation factors 1 ... 4, telegram (Page 216) 146, 148 or
149 is required.
● The "Controller parameter adaptation" function module (bit r0171.29) is activated.
● The following conditions apply to the adaptation of "APC / APC ECO Tv (p3769)" and "APC /
APC ECO filter (p3766)":
– A SINUMERIK license for the "Advanced Position Control" (6FC5800-0_M13-0YB0)
option is required to use the "Advanced Position Control (APC)" function module (bit
r0108.7) with SINUMERIK.
– A SINUMERIK license for the "Advanced Position Control ECO"
(6FC5800-0_M12-0YB0) option is required to use the "Active Vibration Suppression
(AVS/APC-ECO)" function module (bit r0108.19) with SINUMERIK.
8.6.2 Intelligent dynamic response adjustment – function
Benefits
The "Intelligent dynamic response adjustment" function is used to optimize the following
characteristics of a machine tool by adapting control parameters:
● Shorter machining times
● Increased dynamic response
● Greater accuracy
● Enhanced precision
The machine manufacturer is supported in the commissioning of the function by dialogs on the
user interface: "Commissioning" → softkey "NC" → Menu forward key → softkey"Adaptations"
operating area. The softkey is not shown until the option has been set.
Condition
Software option
"Intelligent dynamic response adjustment" (6FC5800-0_S23-0YB0)
The "Intelligent dynamic response adjustment" function adjusts the control parameters for axes
with a stability that changes at different positions or at different traversing velocities as a
function of the position or velocity.

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
The following control parameters can be adapted:

● Servo gain factor (position controller gain)
● Torque feedforward control
● Drive adaptation factor 1 ... 4: A maximum of 4 drive variables from parameter p2782[0...3]
"Mode adaptation" can be adapted.
– Kp speed controller P gain adaptation speed
– Tn speed controller integral time adaptation speed
– Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator and numerator
– Speed controller reference model natural frequency and damping
– APC / APC ECO Tv (p3769)
– APC / APC ECO filter (p3766)
Please note the following supplementary conditions:
● The associated input axis must be referenced for position-dependent adaptation.
● For the adaptation of the drive adaptation factors 1 ... 4, telegram (Page 216) 146, 148 or
149 is required.
● The "Controller parameter adaptation" function module (bit r0171.29) is activated.
● The following conditions apply to the adaptation of "APC / APC ECO Tv (p3769)" and "APC /
APC ECO filter (p3766)":
– A SINUMERIK license for the "Advanced Position Control" (6FC5800-0_M13-0YB0)
option is required to use the "Advanced Position Control (APC)" function module (bit
r0108.7) with SINUMERIK.
– A SINUMERIK license for the "Advanced Position Control ECO"
(6FC5800-0_M12-0YB0) option is required to use the "Active Vibration Suppression
(AVS/APC-ECO)" function module (bit r0108.19) with SINUMERIK.

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
8.6.3 Commissioning the function
Basic procedure
The following procedure is recommended for commissioning the "Intelligent load adjustment"
function:
● Set licensed SINUMERIK Option S11 for the "Intelligent load adjustment" function.
The SINAMICS "Moment of inertia estimator" function module (bit r0108.30) can be used to
determine the moment of inertia of the axis.
● Set licensed SINUMERIK Option S23 for the "Intelligent dynamic response adjustment"
function.
● Enter the adaptation in the "Adaptations – Overview" dialog, "New >" softkey.
● Enable adaptation with "Reset (po)".
Note
No adaptation active
Without active adaptation, the dynamic response and control parameters in the machine data
are effective.
The description of the function module can be found in the SINAMICS S120 Function Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763287) "Drive Functions".
A description of the SINAMICS parameters can be found in the SINAMICS S120/S150 List
Manual. (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763271)
The online help on SINUMERIK Operate shows you how to enter adaptations.

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
Adaptations – Overview
Example of an adaptation:
In this dialog, all adaptations are shown in a tabular overview.

The dynamic response and control parameters can be adjusted as functions of the following
input variables:
● Moment of inertia
● Position
● Velocity
Inputting an adaptation writes the following machine data:
Mode MD16501 $MN_CADAPT_MODE

Input axis MD16504 $MN_CADAPT_INPUT_AX
Input variable MD16502 $MN_CADAPT_INPUT = 1 (default setting)
Input value MD16506 $MN_CADAPT_INPUT_VALUE_1
MD16507 $MN_CADAPT_INPUT_VALUE_2
Output axis MD16505 $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT_AX
Output variable MD16503 $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT
Output value MD16508 $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT_VALUE_1
MD16509 $MN_CADAPT_OUTPUT_VALUE_2
⇒ Additional actions:
● Press the "New >" softkey to enter a new adaptation table.
● Press the "Change >" softkey to change values or the number of table rows.
● Press the "Filter >" softkey to filter the overview by individual columns.

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
● Press the "Diagnostics" softkey to display the currently effective values.

● Press the "Delete" softkey to delete the selected adaptation table.
8.6.4 Example: Enter an adaptation for acceleration
Objective
The acceleration (DYNROUGH) of the X axis should be adapted as a function of the moment
of inertia of the X axis.
Enter adaptation
Procedure:
1. In the operating area, select "Commissioning" → "NC" → Menu forward key → "Adaptations"
and then the "New >" softkey. The "Enter adaptation" dialog is opened.
2. Select the mode, and the X axis as input axis.
3. Select "Acceleration (DYNROUGH)" as output variable.
4. Expand the table to enter the following values:
Input value [kgm2] Output value [%]

1. 0.010000 150.0
2. 0.012000 130.0
3. 0.014000 110.0
4. 0.016000 110.0
5. 0.018000 100.0
5. Press the "Accept" softkey to display the adaptation in the "Adaptations - Overview" dialog.
6. A "Reset (po)" is required to activate the values in the machine data.
Rules for entering adaptations

The input and output values of an adaptation table are only valid and written to the machine
data with the "Accept" softkey if the adaptation table fulfills the following criteria:
● Output values less than 100% are not permissible for the output variable "acceleration".
● In a simple adaptation table, only one of the two input values is permitted to be zero.
● In a complex adaptation table, the first and last input values are permitted to be zero.
● In the event of changes, the input values must be entered into a complex adaptation table
in ascending order.

NC commissioning
8.6 Adaptations
Result
The adaptation table is shown in the "Adaptations - Overview" dialog:

NC commissioning
8.7 Diagnosis → System utilization
System utilization
The channel-specific system utilization is displayed in the "Diagnostics" → Menu forward key →
"System utilization" operating area:
Total system utilization in milliseconds [ms]: MD10050 $MN_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

(system base cycle)
Component Current value display

Position controller Position-control cycle time display: MD10061 $MN_POSTCTRL_CY‐
CLE_TIME
Interpolator Interpolation cycle display: MD10071 $MN_IPO_CYCLE_TIME
Synchronized actions To display the time required for synchronized actions, activate
MD11510 $MN_IPO_MAX_LOAD. Enter the proportion of the interpo‐
lator cycle in %.
Preprocessing The factor for the interpolator cycle can be set in
MD10070 $MN_IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO.
NC load from position control‐ MD10185 $MN_NCK_PCOS_TIME_RATIO = 90 (default setting)
ler and interpolator The average current load should not exceed 50%.
In order to have sufficient reserves for the program processing, the
maximum load in typical operations should not exceed 75%.
Interpolator buffer level The channel-specific filling level is displayed in
MD28060 $MC_MM_NUM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE, and indicates wheth‐
er block preparation for block processing can commence.
Jerky machining in continuous-path mode, if for instance a number of
short traversing blocks have been programmed in succession, is a typ‐
ical indicator of the interpolator buffer idling.
Observe the settings for isochronous operation: (Page 66)
The SINUMERIK Operate Online Help provides more detailed, context-related

information about the machine data.

NC commissioning

Configuring PLC-controlled drives 9
9.1 Introduction
Commissioning of PLC-controlled drives

The following tools support the commissioning of PLC-controlled drives:
● SINUMERIK Operate:
– Guided commissioning (Page 109) with the drive wizard for drive objects.
– Manual commissioning (Page 139) performed by experienced commissioning
engineers.
● Access to the parameters of all drive objects in the "Commissioning" → "Machine data"
operating area.
● Support for the series commissioning of the PLC-controlled drives, because the parameters
are contained in the commissioning archive.
● Topology views, including a list of all drive units of this type that have been found.
● Diagnostics (Page 173) with alarms from those PLC drives whose time stamp is
synchronized with the system.
Note
PLC axes with special functions
Guided commissioning, e.g. for vector control, is not provided by the wizard in SINUMERIK
Operate. To do this, the STARTER commissioning software appropriate for the version can be
used.
PLC axes can only be used with the "basic positioning" (EPOS) function module if
commissioning takes place via STARTER.

Configuring PLC-controlled drives
9.2 Configuration via PROFIBUS
9.2.1 Supplementary conditions for PLC-controlled drives
Supported versions
Note
The SINUMERIK CNC software V4.9x supports the following Control Units with SINAMICS
firmware V5.2:
● CU310-2 DP / CU310-2 PN
● CU320-2 DP / CU320-2 PN
The following applies to PLC-controlled drives:

● Controlled directly from the PLC program.
● Integration in the part program sequence by means of auxiliary functions (H command).
Quantity framework
SINUMERIK 840D sl
Scaling 710.3B PN 720.3B PN 730.3B PN
Drives (drive control DOs) in total2): 15 40 50
● Of which assigned to the NC, maximum : 2) 8 31 31
● Resulting from this, those not assigned to the 7 9 19
NC, minimum:
● Not assigned to the NC, maximum: 15 40 50
Drive units (DO1) with drive control objects, in to‐ 9 13 15
tal2):
● Of which at the virtual, integrated PROFIBUS, 4 6 6
maximum3):
● Of which at the virtual, integrated PROFIBUS, 1 1 1
minimum:
● Of which at the DP interface1) minimum: 5 7 9
● Of which at the DP interface1) maximum: 8 12 14
1)
X126: PROFIBUS DP of the integrated PLC; X136: PROFIBUS DP/MPI of the integrated PLC
2)
The sum is monitored using alarm 380077

Extending the quantity framework

With MD13160 $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS >0, all SINAMICS drives whose
bus address or device number (n +1) is greater than the entered value (n) are operated on the
PLC as standard slaves according to the PROFIdrive profile and are not included in the NC
quantity framework according to the above table. This address can be set individually for each
bus.
MD13160 $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[i] Highest address for each bus type:

$MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[0] PROFIBUS DP1 (X126)
$MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[1] PROFIBUS DP2 (X136)
$MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[2] PROFIBUS DP3 integrated
$MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[3] PROFINET (X150)
A distinction is made between the following scenarios:

● The default setting MD13160 $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[i] = 0 means that
all connected and configured drives are included in the quantity framework.
● If $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[i] > 0, all SINAMICS drives with a bus
address or device number greater than the entered value are not included in the quantity
framework, and can be used, for example, for further PLC axes.
Example:
So that all the drives connected via PROFINET, do not have to be taken into account in the NC
quantity framework, MD13160 $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRESS[3] must be = 1 (= n)
and must be configured in HW Config as the lowest device number 2 (= n+1).
The extended operator control options for the PLC drives produce the following supplementary
conditions:
● Because the PLC drives create an additional communication load, the number of these drive
objects (DO) is limited depending on the NCU ⇒ observe the quantity framework:
● Alarm 380077 "PROFIBUS/PROFINET: Too many DOs: currently %2, maximum %3 in DO
group %1"
● Depending on the versions used, the texts displayed for the SINAMICS parameters and
messages may be incomplete.
● If the drives are assigned to the NC and distributed across several buses, such as DP and
DP integrated, then it must be ensured that each isochronous bus has the same cycle clock
settings. It is also true for the time of day synchronization via NC with telegram 390 that the
cycle settings match for each isochronous bus.
● A DO1 drive unit is required for the internal virtual PROFIBUS DP3 for access to the onboard
I/O including probe.

Note
PROFIBUS DP (X126)
The following should be observed for all drive units connected to an external PROFIBUS DP:
● In the configuration, the user must take into account the supply as well as the switch-on and
switch-off behavior in interaction with the other axes and their supply.
● For the terminal wiring, observe the "Machine Configuration Guidelines" System Manual. In
the simplest case, the feedback signal of the Line Module must be connected to the PLC-
controlled drives (see also: Terminal assignment (Page 103)).
9.2.2 Example: Configuration of the drive components
Overview
The SINAMICS drive system for PLC-drives communicates with the PLC via the PROFIBUS
DP X126 interface. The commissioning described in this chapter orientates itself on the
following example configuration of the SINAMICS drive line-up:

+7 3&8
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
352),%86,2
'5,9(&/L4
6,180(5,.'VO 1; 6,1$0,&66

ZLWK6,1$0,&66
&8'3 •••
3RZHUVXSSO\
6HUYRPRWRUV
0DLQVSLQGOHPRWRU
Figure 9-1 Configuration via PROFIBUS
Already commissioned are:

● NCU and NX15.3 with additional components.

In this section, the following will be put into operation:

● CU320-2 DP with an infeed (Line Module) and a Double Motor Module.
9.2.3 Commissioning the PLC
Overview
The following steps are carried out when commissioning drives controlled from a PLC for the
first time:
1. PLC commissioning
2. Creating a PLC program
3. Commissioning drives controlled from a PLC
4. Commissioning NC ⇔ drive communication
Precondition
● You have connected the PG/PC to the PLC (see Connect PG/PC with PLC (Page 47)).
● You have started the SIMATIC Manager and created a project (see
SIMATIC S7 project overview (Page 48)).
● You have inserted a SIMATIC Station-300 in the project (see
Adding SINUMERIK NCU to the HW Config (Page 49)).
● You have started HW Config.
● On the integrated PROFIBUS you have configured an NCU and NX15.3.
Interfaces
The PLC must be notified about the PROFIBUS interfaces of SINAMICS. You generate a
SIMATIC S7 project using the SIMATIC Manager.
To do this, perform the following steps:
● Insert an S120 CU320-2 DP in HW Config.
● Configure the properties of the PROFIBUS interface.
● Compile the configuration and then download it to the PLC.
Note
The SINUMERIK Toolbox must be installed.

Inserting an S120 CU320-2 DP component

Procedure:
1. Navigate in the catalog to "PROFIBUS DP" → "SINAMICS" → "SINAMICS S120" → "S120
CU320-2 DP":
2. Keeping the left mouse key pressed, drag the "S120 CU320-2 DP" in the station window to
PROFIBUS (1): DP master system.

3. After releasing the mouse key, configure the properties of the SINAMICS PROFIBUS
interface:

5. In the "Version" selection box, select the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Note
The firmware version must match the version of the CompactFlash card on the
CU320-2 DP. Refer to the upgrade instructions for the versions that have been released for
PLC-controlled drives.

7. In the PROFIBUS DP master system (SINUMERIK NCU) under "Properties" → "Network
settings" → "Options" and under the "Equidistance" tab activate the option "Activate
equidistant bus cycle".

8. In the "DP Slave Properties" of the CU320-2 DP under the "Clock synchronization" tab,
activate the option "Synchronize drive to equidistant DP cycle".
9. In the "DP Slave Properties" dialog box, select the "Configuration" tab.
10.Select in the "Overview" the telegrams required for the individual objects (axes and
CU320-2 DP):
– "Siemens telegram 2, PZD-4/4" for example, for speed-controlled axes
– "Siemens telegram 390, PZD-2/2" for CU320-2 DP
Note
SIEMENS telegram 390 is required for the time stamp of alarms from the PLC.

11.Change under "Configuration" to the "Details" view in order to display the associated
generated input and output addresses for the individual objects:
12.Confirm with "OK".

To support automatic device commissioning, the input and output addresses must be identical
because the addresses in the PLC program are required for the FB283.

Result
Saving/compiling/loading into the module

Procedure:
2. Click the "Load in module" button to load the configuration to the PLC (Page 65).
In the next step, you create the PLC program.

Requirements
This chapter describes the configuration of PLC drives that are not to be operated as NC axes.
The following expansions of the function blocks are required in the PLC program: You will need
additional S7 function blocks from the SINAMICS toolbox ≥ V2.1. This Zip file contains a
manual in several languages.
The SINAMICS Toolbox is available in the Internet at the following link: SINAMICS Toolbox
V2.1 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/25166781)
Signals "WR_PZD" and "RD_PZD"

The "WR_PZD" and "RD_PZD" signals for FC70 in the example have the following meaning:
Signal Typ Typ Range of values Remark

e e
WR_PZD I Any P#Mm.n byte x Target range for process data, master → slave (control words / set‐
P#DBno.DBXm.n byte x points)
Here, generally the axis DB is used, i.e. in the pointer, the same DB
number must be specified as formal parameter "NR_ACHS_DB".
The length of the pointer is 30 bytes for Siemens telegram 136.
RD_PZD I Any P#Mm.n byte x Target range for process data, slave → master (status words / actual
P#DBno.DBXm.n byte x values)
Here, generally the axis DB is used, i.e. in the pointer, the same DB
number must be specified as formal parameter "NR_ACHS_DB".
The length of the pointer is 38 bytes for Siemens telegram 136.
Example with constant speed (fan, pump)

Procedure:
1. You have already created a project and find yourself on the main screen of the SIMATIC
Manager.
2. Select the "File" → "Open" menu and then click the "User projects" tab.
3. Open the example project and copy the FB283, FC70, DB70 and DB283 blocks as well as
all UDT300xx into your existing project.
4. As the DB70 could be used by another PLC program, rename DB70 as DB111!
5. Create a new FC73. Do not use the FC73 from the SINAMICS toolbox.
In the example, 4000hex corresponds to the rated speed in drive parameter p2000.

6. Edit the OB1, FC70 and FC73 blocks in accordance with the following examples.
Example of OB1:
…
CALL FC70
CALL FC73
…
Example of FC70:
CALL FB283, DB283

NR_ACHS_DB := 111
LADDR := 272 //Logical I/O address
LADDR_DIAG := 8186 //Diagnostic addresses
WR_PZD := P#DB111.DBX172.0 Byte 8 //Source range for outputs
RD_PZD := P#DB111.DBX212.0 Byte 8 //Target range for inputs
CONSIST := TRUE
RESTART := FALSE
AXIS_NO := B#16#3 //Number of the drive object
Example of FC73:
UN E30.0 //E.g. switch for the enable signal

SPB frei
L W#16#47E //All enables set
T DB111.DBW172
U E3.7 //MCP reset
= DB111.DBX173.7 //Reset fault memory
BEA
frei:
L W#16#47E //All enable signals except ON/OFF1
T DB111.DBW172
L W#16#4000 //Rated speed in drive parameter p2000
T DB111.DBW174 //Set speed high
7. You have now finished programming the PLC program. Load the project to the PLC
(Page 87).
8. To synchronize the PLC and NC, a system reset (po) is required:
– NCU: RUN LED is continuously lit green.
– NCU: Status display shows a "6" with a flashing dot.
– SINAMICS CU320-2 DP: LED RDY flashes slowly green (0.5 Hz)
⇒ PLC and NC are in cyclic operation.

9.4 Commissioning PLC drives
Automatic device configuration

Procedure:
1. Select the "Commissioning" → "Drive system" operating area.
2. Confirm with "OK". You will then be guided through the individual steps of the automatic
device configuration.
3. In the "Machine configuration" overview, press the "Drives without NC assignment" softkey
to display all drive objects:

Diagnostics
The status is likewise displayed in the "Diagnostics" → "Axis diagnostics" → "Service axis"
operating area with the selection "Drives without NC axis assignment".

9.5 Checking the communication to the drive
9.5 Checking the communication to the drive
Check configuration
The PLC alarms of the drives must have an identical time stamp with the NC.
For the configuration in the hardware configuration, define the associated Siemens telegram
390 for the SINAMICS CU. The corresponding logical input and output addresses of this
communication interface are entered in the following machine data item:
● MD13120[n] CONTROL_UNIT_LOGIC_ADDRESS
● MD13120[1]...[5] are reserved for NX expansion modules.
Note
You can view these logical addresses in the HW configuration when configuring the
properties of SINAMICS components under "Details".
Procedure:
1. Check the logical address for SINAMICS CU in the "Commissioning" → "Machine data" →
"General MD" operating area and enter, for example, the following value:
MD13120[6] = 288
2. Press the "Reset (po)" softkey to accept the changed machine data.
This completes the commissioning of the PLC drives.

9.6 Safety functions for PLC drives
Introduction
This section only partially describes how a PLC drive can be integrated in a safety-related
application. In this case, the published supplement of the PROFIdrive profile that includes drive-
based safety functions via the PROFIsafe supplement with telegram 30 is used.
Basic procedure
The following steps are necessary to integrate drive-based safety functions:
● Configuration with SIMATIC Manager under HW Config.
● Embedding in safe programmable logic (SPL).
References
For the implementation, reference is made to the following function manuals for safety
functions which are binding for the safety-related version:
● SINUMERIK 840D sl Safety Integrated Function Manual
● "Control via PROFIsafe" section in the SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated (FHS) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109763292) Function Manual
9.6.1 Configuring PROFIsafe
Requirement
In order to configure PROFIsafe, it is necessary that the "S7 Configurations Pack" option is
installed.

Configuring the operating sequence for PROFIsafe

Procedure:
1. For this telegram, select the PROFIsafe telegram 30 in the "Option" selection field.
2. Under the "Details" tab, set the input/output addresses. The PROFIsafe option requires an
additional 6 bytes.
3. Click the "PROFIsafe ... " button to set the F parameters.

4. To change the "F_Dest_Add" parameter, select "F_Dest_Add" in the "Parameter Name"

column and click the "Change value ..." button.
5. Check the following values/settings:

– The value of the "F_Dest_Add" parameter must be entered as a hexadecimal value in
p9610 and p9810 of the corresponding drive (e.g. 200dec corresponds to C8hex).
– The value of the "F_Source_Add" must match the other used PROFIsafe modules and
also be entered in MD10385 $MN_PROFISAFE_MASTER_ADRESS.
– It must be ensured that the same source address is set for all PROFIsafe modules.

Result of the PROFIsafe configuring
9.6.2 Example: Embedding in safe programmable logic (SPL)
Introduction
The following machine data and files must be taken into account when embedding telegram 30
in a safe programmable logic:
● NC machine data
● Drive machine data
● "safe.SPF" file
● PLC program expansion

NC machine data
The SPL PROFIsafe configuration for the basic safety functions STO without SSI are then
shown:
Archive excerpt Comment

CHANDATA(1)
N10385 $MN_PROFISAFE_MASTER_ADDRESS='H50007d2'
N10386 $MN_PROFISAFE_IN_ADDRESS[0]='H50000c8' ;=> entry from HW Config
N10387 $MN_PROFISAFE_OUT_ADDRESS[0]='H50000c8' ;=> entry from HW Config
...
N10390 $MN_PROFISAFE_IN_ASSIGN[0]=9011 ;=> INSE[9] for S_STW1.0 No Safe Torque Off
;=> INSE[10] for S_STW1.1 No Safe Stop 1
;=> INSE[11] for S_STW1.7 INTERNAL_EVENT_ACK
; No extended functions
...
N10400 $MN_PROFISAFE_OUT_ASSIGN[0]=9011 ;=> OUTSE[9] for S_ZSW1.0 Power removed
;=> OUTSE[10] for S_ZSW1.1 Safe Stop 1 not active
;=> OUTSE[11] for S_ZSW1.7 INTERNAL_EVENT
; No extended functions
...
N13300 $MN_PROFISAFE_IN_FILTER[0]='H83'
...
N13320 $MN_PROFISAFE_OUT_FILTER[0]='H83'
...
Drive machine data

Values that have been added as a result of telegram 30:
● p9601=p9801=0x8
● p9610=p9810=0xC8
"safe.SPF" file:
Program example Comment

IDS = 40 DO $A_OUTSE[09] = $A_INSE[2] ;If the cover is locked then deselect STO
IDS = 41 DO $A_OUTSE[10] = $A_INSE[2] ;If the cover is locked then deselect SS1
PLC program extension:

U "SPL".SPL_DATA.INSEP[2]; // => cover switch locked?
= "SPL".SPL_DATA.OUTSEP[9]; // $A_OUTSE[9] =1 => Deselect STO
= "SPL".SPL_DATA.OUTSEP[10]; // $A_OUTSE[10] =1 => Deselect SS1
//Enable signal OFF1 set:
UN "SPL".SPL_DATA.INSEP[9]; // => No STO?
UN "SPL".SPL_DATA.INSEP[10]; // => No SS1?
U E 0.0; // only if OFF1 is also requested via switch


= "CU320_A".Speed_Control.WR_PZD_DREHZAHL.STW1.Aus1 ;


Drive tuning 10
10.1 Tuning procedure
Precondition
Once the drives have been commissioned and the axes assigned, you must start tuning the
particular machine or a machine type.
● The commissioning of the drives has been completed.
● The topology has been checked and is OK.
Tuning procedure
Depending on the requirements, the following tuning procedure is recommended: Procedure
when tuning axes and drives (Page 26)
Especially efficient procedure: Tuning, utilizing all default settings of the automatic servo tuning:
● Example: How to tune the X1 axis (Page 293)
● Example: How to tune the Z1 axis (Page 297)
● Example: This is how you start to tune the path interpolation (Page 300)
Procedure for experts:
● Tuning using the automatic servo tuning with manual parameter settings:
Example for experts: Axis tuning (Page 307)
● Tuning using measuring functions and manual parameter settings of the position controller,
speed controller and current controller:
– Example: Setting the filter for the following error (speed control loop) (Page 319)
– Examples for the measuring methods (position control loop) (Page 323)
– Example, function generator: Speed setpoint after the filter (Page 327)
The SINUMERIK Operate Online Help provides more detailed, context-related in‐
formation on the parameterization of the "Automatic Servo Tuning".
References
Further information can be found in the Basic Functions (A3), (G2) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763231) Function Manual

Drive tuning
10.2 Function overview for the tuning
10.2 Function overview for the tuning
Commissioning → Tuning/test
The following functions are available to support the commissioning:
● Automatic servo tuning
● Measuring functions (Page 311) (current control loop, speed control loop, position control
loop)
● Function generator (Page 325)
● Circularity test (Page 330)
● Characteristic curves for the hydraulic module (if present)
● Active filters (Page 329)
Figure 10-1 Example: "Automatic servo tuning"
Diagnosis → Trace
With the "Trace (Page 159)" function, you select the NC variables, PLC variables or drive
variables whose signal chart is to be visualized:
● Trace for PLC/NC//servo variables
Recording and graphical representation of the signal values with respect to time, such as
actual position value, following error, etc.
● Trace for drive variables
Recording and graphical representation of the signal values with respect to time from the
drive system, such as e.g. speed actual value, current actual value etc.

Drive tuning
10.3 Automatic servo tuning
Which functions are available?

The following options are available for automatically tuning an axis:
● Selection of an individual axis for tuning
● Selection of a strategy from many options
● Reconfiguration of measurement conditions
● Chart display and activity log for tuning process
● Display of the measured frequency responses (speed control system) and the calculated
frequency responses (open circuit, closed control loop)
● Checking and processing the tuning results for speed and position controller: The response
of the control loop is simulated on the basis of the frequency response and displayed in the
bode diagram.
● Accept or reject the results of the tuning
The function "Automatic servo tuning" is started in the operating area "Commissioning"
→ "Automatic servo tuning", and can be used for all servo and direct drives.
Interpolation axes
For axes which make up an interpolation group, additional tuning steps should be undertaken,
e.g.:
● Path interpolation (Page 300) with the automatic servo tuning.
● Circularity test (Page 330)
● Adjust servo gain factor.
● When using feedforward control, transfer equivalent time constants of the slowest axis
(highest value) in all interpolating axes.
10.3.1 Setting the options for the measurement procedure
Options in JOG mode

In the first step, press the "Options" softkey to set the general behavior for automatic servo
tuning.
For a predominantly automatic sequence in the JOG mode the following selection is
recommended, utilizing all automatic sequences and settings:

Drive tuning
Condition for AUTO mode
Software option
In order to use this function a license is required for the following option: "Call AST
from the part program" (6FC5800-0_S10-0YB0)

Drive tuning
With the option "Assign this HMI for "Call AST from the part program"", you select SINUMERIK
Operate to perform the automatic servo tuning in the AUTO mode:
● ☑ If this option is selected, the current SINUMERIK Operate performs the automatic servo
tuning.
● ☐ If this option is not selected, a different SINUMERIK Operate performs the automatic
servo tuning.
Sequence in AUTO mode

As a result of the changing load, for direct drives (e.g. torque motors) it may be necessary to
tune the axis involved for each new workpiece size or clamping device.
Standard cycles (CYCLE751...759) are available, that machine OEMs can use in a
manufacturer cycle. The automatic servo tuning can be parameterized and started using the
cycles. The previous settings and results from the automatic servo tuning can be employed,
using SINUMERIK Operate. The machine manufacturer provides the machine operator with a
manufacturer's cycle, which includes the appropriate commands. This means that after
retuning, an end user can insert a manufacturer's cycle in his part program, which performs the
tuning and selects the appropriate data sets. The part program does not have to be interrupted
for the retuning.
The following settings must be made by the machine manufacturer so that the cycle call for the
automatic servo tuning from the part program functions at the end user.
● The instance of SINUMERIK Operate on which the cycles are executed has been selected.
● The XML files with the appropriate tuning settings for the respective axis, which are required
by the cycles, are available.
● The manufacturer cycles are available, and when required a parameter set switchover is set
up.
References
Description of the cycles and syntax in the "Automatic Retuning" Chapter in the Special
Functions (T4) (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/109763229) Function
Manual

Drive tuning
10.3.2 Selecting the tuning strategy
Default setting for "Axis" strategy

Select a tuning strategy for axis, speed controller and position controller with the "Select
strategy >" softkey. It is recommended to apply strategies 102, 303 and 203:
Figure 10-2 "Strategy: axis" - default setting 102
For the "Axis" strategy, select which controller should be tuned. When doing this, the tuned,
closed control loop can be measured to check the results. When selecting the "User-defined
strategy (108)" for the axis, all the options are active and can be set:

Drive tuning
Figure 10-3 "Strategy: axis" - example (108)
Further strategies are available in the selection list and can be combined with a tuning
objective. The "Adapt strategy" softkey can be used to activate and set the individual options.
Example for "Speed": Strategy 303
Figure 10-4 "Strategy: n/v controller" - example

Drive tuning
The most important settings are: Tuning aggressiveness and minimum integral time Tn.
● Tuning aggressiveness:
This parameter determines the setting of Kp and Tn based on stability limits. The phase
margin and amplitude margin values are pre-assigned according to this setting.
– Default setting = 0.5
– Min = 0 [maximum stability]
– Max = 1 [maximum aggressiveness]
● Minimum integral time Tn:
This parameter prevents automatic servo tuning from setting the integrator time of the speed
control loop too low. If the automatic servo tuning sets a value lower than this parameter has
set, the actual value used will be limited to the value set by the minimum integral time Tn.
A higher integral time ensures a more rugged closed-loop control if changes to the weight
or the moment of inertia are expected. This is recommended for direct drives and main
spindles of turning machines.
– Default setting = 10 ms
– Min = 0.5 ms
– Max = 100 ms
● Pole/zero point identification as from frequency:
This parameter sets the lower limit value of the frequency range, through which the
automatic servo tuning searches for natural frequency modes: Pole and zero points on the
controlled system. This parameter is intended to prevent measurement noise in the low
frequency range being incorrectly marked as the pole or zero position. The frequencies
identified as pole or zero positions play a role in the estimation of the total inertia of the axis.
For this reason, it is important that the lowest natural frequency of the axis is correctly
identified by the automatic servo tuning.
On large machines with low frequency vibration modes, it may be necessary to reduce the
15 Hz default value of this parameter. The reduction of this parameter may have to be
accompanied by a reduction in the bandwidth of the measurement of the speed-controlled
system.
Default setting: 15 Hz

Drive tuning
Example for "Position": Strategy 203
Figure 10-5 "Strategy: Position control loop" - example
The value for reducing the servo gain factor and its upper limit depend on the selected tuning
objective.
● Reduce servo gain factor
The maximum servo gain factor is calculated from the automatic servo tuning; in the
process, no overshoot is allowed with the position controller. The maximum servo gain
factor is the value that does not result in any overshoot. The maximum servo gain factor can
be reduced to increase ruggedness against mechanical changes. A reserve of 40% is set
for the tuning objective "moderate responsiveness". Furthermore, the servo gain factor is
limited to 4 mm/min.
– Default setting = 0.6
– Min = 0.1
– Max = 1 (no reduction)
● Feedforward control mode: Torque feedforward control is recommended.
When telegram 136 is used, the torque feedforward control allows the highest contour
precision to be achieved.
Tuning objective
The default settings for speed and position controllers are adapted by selecting the tuning
objective.

Drive tuning
● Maximum responsiveness:
The speed and position controller gain (servo gain factor) is tuned with maximum values and
minimum ruggedness.
Application: High-speed machining with maximum suppression of all disturbing forces such
as friction, teeth of the drive belt, strong cutting forces, when machining titanium, for
example. Recommended for high-speed machining with linear motors.
Condition: The machine must have a rigid design; the dynamic masses do not change
significantly.
● Moderate responsiveness (= default):
This controller dynamic response is sufficient for the majority of machines and applications.
The setting is more rugged than "Maximum responsiveness".
Application: The inertia or the load mass of the axes does not change much and therefore
this setting is suitable for numerous applications.
● Conservative/robust responsiveness:
Only weak control gains are selected in order to ensure as high a level of ruggedness as
possible.
The speed controller is tuned so that it achieves maximum damping to prevent oscillations
and to achieve good position controller gain.
Application: Recommended for machines on which the mechanical axis system or the load
mass can change significantly. Also suitable for axes that respond with oscillations, e.g.
main spindles on turning machines or large axes with high load mass.
Recommended for applications with low requirements on the machining time.

Drive tuning
10.3.3 Example: How to tune the X1 axis
Requirement
This example shows how to tune the X1 axis using the "Automatic servo tuning" function. In this
case, the following machine configuration is assumed:
WARNING
Avoiding unwanted axis movements
Automatic servo tuning is based on the analysis of measurements. These measurements
require the axis to move.
Ensure that all axes are in a safe position and no collisions will occur during the traversing
motion that is required.
Number of measurements
For tuning purposes, the following measurements are taken with the speed controller:
Speed controlled system:
● Overall bandwidth: Preliminary measurement in both directions
● Overall bandwidth: Measurement in both directions
● Reduced bandwidth: Preliminary measurement in both directions
● Reduced bandwidth: Measurement in both directions
Mechanical system motor to DMS:
● Measurement in both directions

Drive tuning
Tuning the X1 axis

Procedure:
1. Select the X1 axis in the "Axis selection" dialog.
2. Check the options set: "Options" softkey.
3. Use the preset tuning strategy: "Select strategy" softkey.
4. Check that the tuning objective "Normal responsiveness" is selected.
5. Start the measurement with the "Tune" softkey.

7. Follow the prompts on the screen and press NC START.
0HDVXUHPHQW
&RQILUPWKHVWDUWRIWKHPHDVXUHPHQWLQFKDQQHO
&+$1 ZLWK1&67$57RQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO
3UHVV1&67$57WRFRQWLQXHRUSUHVV0&35HVHWWRFDQFHO
WKHPHDVXUHPHQW
$FDQFHOHGPHDVXUHPHQWFDQEHUHSDUDPHWHUL]HGDQG
UHVWDUWHG
8. Two measurements are taken each time to tune the axis.

Drive tuning
9. Before the measurements are taken, you will be prompted to press NC start. After the
successful completion of the measurements, the tuned values of the parameters are output:
"Speed controller" softkey to check the speed controller parameters.
10.If you agree with the tuned values, confirm with the "Accept" softkey.
11.OR: Enter suitable values in the "Manual" column.
12.After accepting the measurement results, tuning is complete.
13.After completion of the measurement, you can display the complete tuning log: "Tuning log"
softkey.

Drive tuning
X1 axis result
After confirming with "OK", you get the following result:
Figure 10-6 X1 axis: Tuned

Drive tuning
10.3.4 Example: How to tune the Z1 axis
Tuning the Z1 axis

Procedure:
1. Select the Z1 axis in the "Axis selection" dialog.
2. The options and strategy that are set continue to be valid.

3. Start the measurement with the "Tune" softkey.

Drive tuning
5. Follow the prompts on the screen and press NC START.

0HDVXUHPHQW
&RQILUPWKHVWDUWRIWKHPHDVXUHPHQWLQFKDQQHO
&+$1 ZLWK1&67$57RQWKHPDFKLQHFRQWUROSDQHO
3UHVV1&67$57WRFRQWLQXHRUSUHVV0&35HVHWWRFDQFHO
WKHPHDVXUHPHQW
$FDQFHOHGPHDVXUHPHQWFDQEHUHSDUDPHWHUL]HGDQG
UHVWDUWHG
6. Two measurements are taken each time to tune the axis.

7. Before the measurements are taken, you will be prompted to press NC START. After the
successful completion of the measurements, the values of the parameters are output:
8. If you agree with the tuned values, confirm with the "Accept" softkey.
9. OR: Enter new values manually and repeat the measurements.

Drive tuning
10.After accepting the measurement results, tuning is complete.
11.After completion of the measurement, you can display the complete tuning log: "Tuning log"
softkey.
Z1 axis result
After confirming with "OK", you get the following result:
Figure 10-7 Z1 axis: Tuned

Drive tuning
10.3.5 Example: This is how you start to tune the path interpolation
Interpolation of the axes

Procedure:
1. Press the "Interpolation path" softkey to tune the X1 and Z1 axes.
2. Press the "Select strategy" softkey to check the strategy for the interpolation. We
recommend that you use strategy 1105:
The following parameters are adapted:

Drive tuning
– The dynamic adaptation in MD32900 $MA_DYN_MATCH_ENABLE=1 is active.

– The feedforward control is always active.
3. Confirm with "OK". This starts the tuning.

Drive tuning
4. After the "Path interpolation tuning completed" message is output, confirm with "OK".
Then you can switch back and forth between the parameter view (softkey: "Parameters")
and the graphical view (softkey: "Bode diagrams").
Figure 10-8 Parameter view
Figure 10-9 Graphic view
With the " >>" softkey, you can switch the vertical softkey bar to access the following
selection:
– Softkey: "Retune"
– Softkey: "Back to tuned"

Drive tuning
– Softkey: "Back to axis tuning"

– Softkey: "<<"
– Softkey: "Save to file"
To save the tuning data in a file, press "Save to file": An XML file is created.
– Softkey: "Generate report"

To create a report, press "Generate report (Page 304)": A report is created in RTF format.
5. To exit the interpolation process, press "Close".
This message indicates that more axes must be tuned to provide a regular interpolation result:
$XWRPDWVHUYRWXQLQJ
127(7KHFRUUHFWPDWFKLQJRIWKHD[HVIRUWKHSDWKLQWHUSRODWLRQ
UHTXLUHVDGGLWLRQDOPHDVXUHVDIWHUFRPSOHWLRQRIWKHDXWRPDWLF
WXQLQJRIDOOD[HV
)XUWKHUGHWDLOVLQWKHORJ

Drive tuning
Result
If you want to accept the interpolation result, confirm with "Accept". "Cancel" will start the
interpolation again.
To check which values the parameters have been set to for tuning purposes, press "<< Back".
10.3.6 Example of a report
Logging the result

The following logs can be generated to document the tuning results, i.e. parameters and
diagrams:
● The interpolation result can be saved as an XML file: "Save to file" softkey.
● A report can also be created in RTF format: "Generate report" softkey.
Example of a report
The report is output in the language set on the control system:
Machine
Date of the session 2012-07-02

Time of the session 14:58:42
Machine axis name Z1
SAT version 4.5.1.0.2
Serial number 112009D1008M1905
Date of the report 2012-07-02

Drive tuning
Time of the report 15:07:56

XML file AST_AX3_Z1_112009D1008M1905.xml
Position controller: Bode diagrams
Optimal standalone:
--- (violet) Calc. closed Position control loop without FFW
--- (blue) Measured position control loop
Parameter Optimal stand‐ Optimal self-opti‐ Initial platform configu‐

alone mized stand‐ ration
alone axis
Servo gain factor 5.154 5.154 6 rpm
Feedforward control mode Torque Torque Off
Equivalent time for FFW 0.001459 0.001459 0 s
Feeder delay time for speed 0.0004588 0.0004588 0 s
feedforward control
Moment of inertia for torque 0.0002772 0.0002772 0 kgm²
feedforward control
DSC active Correct Correct Correct
Estimated dead time 0.000125 0.000125 0.000125 s
Update date 0.002 0.002 0.002 s
Optimal standalone: Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
amping quency tenuation
DS PT1 3999
DS PT1 3999

Drive tuning
Optimal self-optimized Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
standalone axis: amping quency tenuation
None
Initial platform configura‐ Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
tion: amping quency tenuation
None
Speed controller: Bode diagrams
Optimal standalone:
--- (violet) Closed speed control loop calculated
--- (blue) Closed speed control loop measured
Parameter Optimal stand‐ Optimal self-opti‐ Initial platform con‐

alone mized standalone figuration
axis
Proportional gain Kp 0.09246 0.09246 0.2 Nms/rad
Integral time Tn 0.007639 0.007639 0.05 s
Reference model active Correct Correct Incorrect
Frequency reference model 77.12 77.12 0 Hz
Damping reference model 0.7071 0.7071 1 s
Dead time reference model 0 0 0 s
Actual speed value smooth‐ 0 0 0 kgm²
ing time
Motor moment of inertia 2.7e-05 2.7e-05 2.7e-05 kgm²
Update date 0.000125 0.000125 0.000125 s

Drive tuning
Optimal standalone: Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
amping quency tenuation
SW PT2 2000 0.707 X X
SW Second order 540.1 0.7071 540.1 0.04158 X
SW Second order 1213 0.4158 1213 0.172 X
SW PT2 387 0.707 X
Optimal self-optimized Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
standalone axis: amping quency tenuation
SW PT2 2000 0.707 X X
SW Second order 540.1 0.7071 540.1 0.04158 X
SW Second order 1213 0.4158 1213 0.172 X
SW PT2 387 0.707 X
Initial platform configura‐ Frequency XX_D filter Counter fre‐ Counter at‐ Res. Act.
tion: amping quency tenuation
SW Second order 500 2.182 550 0.1093 X X
10.3.7 Example for experts: Axis tuning
Axis: User-specific strategy (108)
Perform preliminary measurement to determine the excitation ☐

Deactivate controller properties that are not supported in the NC and drive ☑
Measure smoothed speed setpoint step to generate a mechanical model ☐ >
Measure speed-controlled system ☑ >
Check the measured data quality ☑
Measure speed-controlled system with reduced bandwidth ☐ >
Measure speed control loop for speed controller-controlled system model ☑ >
Tune the speed controller ☐
Measure speed control loop for checking ☑ >
Measure mechanical system ☑ >
Tune the position controller ☑ >
Control measurement position control loop ☑ >

Drive tuning
Manual setting of the measurement parameters

The tuning objective can be directly entered in "Speed" or "Position". Alternatively, a predefined
strategy (102, etc.) can be selected, accepted with "Adapt strategy" and then changes can be
made.
By activating the checkbox, the commissioning engineer selects the individual steps for
measuring and tuning. Several steps are interdependent: For instance, the speed-controlled
system must always be measured before tuning the speed controller. All checkboxes which
result in a measurement are marked with an arrow. Additional default settings are available for
each measurement using the "Meas. parameters >" vertical softkey.
Perform preliminary measurement to determine the excitation:
The preliminary measurement to determine the excitation can always be selected or
deselected. The preliminary measurement is always recommended when first commissioning
the axis or for unknown mass relationships (load/motor). The measurement parameters for the
following measurement are automatically determined after the preliminary measurement. User-
defined measurement parameters are then overwritten.
Deactivate controller properties that are not supported in the NC and drive:
The following functions are deactivated if they are used:
● Axis:
MD32220 $MA_POSCTRL_INTEGR_ENABLE = 0
MD32610 $MA_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT = 1.0 (should always be 1)
MD32930 $MA_POSCTRL_OUT_FILTER_ENABLE = 0
● Drive:
If the Advanced Position Control (APC) function module is activated: p3700.0 = 0
Velocity control configuration: p1400.5 = 0
The speed controller adaptation is deactivated.
Speed controller integrator feedback time constant: p1494 = 0.0
Measure smoothed speed setpoint step to create a mechanical model:
At the start of the tuning, the load moment of inertia, the stiffness of the coupling and the
correctness of the current controller setting are unknown. A step response can be measured to
make a first estimate. As a consequence, while measuring the speed-controlled system, it is
easier to automatically determine parameters.
Measure speed-controlled system:
This measurement is required to tune the speed controller.
It is initially performed with the maximum bandwidth (e.g. 4000 Hz)
Measure speed-controlled system with reduced bandwidth:
This measurement is required to tune the speed controller.
This measurement is performed with reduced bandwidth in order to improve the frequency
resolution.
Measure speed control loop for speed controller-controlled system model:
This measurement is necessary if the position control loop (including feedforward control) is to
be automatically tuned, but the speed controller was not tuned with automatic servo tuning.
Tune speed controller:

Drive tuning
The parameters for the speed controller (including current setpoint filter) are calculated an the
basis of the measured speed-controlled systems and the specified tuning objective. The
parameters are not transferred into the drive until the axis tuning has been completed, or a
measurement for checking has been performed. The "Speed" settings are applied.
Measure speed control loop for checking:
The closed speed controller is measured with the new parameters. To do this, the new
parameters are written to the drive.
Measure mechanical system:
Measure the transmission link between the motor encoder and direct encoder (e.g. linear
scale). This does not include any influence on the closed-loop control. Using this measurement,
the position control loop can be calculated with closed-loop control on the direct encoder.
Tune position controller: without parameters
Servo gain factor and feedforward control are tuned on the basis of the prior measurements.
The tuning objective is also applied. The "Position" settings are applied. If a second encoder is
setup, then the position control is always calculated as if this second encoder is used for the
position control.
Control measurement position control loop:
The closed position controller is measured with the new parameters. To do this, the new speed
and position control parameters are written to the drive and the NC. The feedforward control
must be disabled for this measurement. Depending on the option setting, this is the reason that
a message is output to press the reset button on the machine control panel. After the
measurement, the feedforward control is reactivated; this why another request for a reset (re)
is issued after the measurement .
⇒ Checking the measurement data quality: without parameters
The software for automatic tuning checks whether the excitation and offset velocity were
sufficient, and then outputs an appropriate message.
⇒ Measurement parameters:
Individual measurement parameters can be entered for each of the following measurements:
● Measure speed setpoint step for the mechanical model
● Measure speed-controlled system
● Measure speed-controlled system with reduced bandwidth
● Measure speed control loop for speed controller-controlled system model
● Measure speed control loop for checking
● Measure mechanical system
● Control measurement position control loop

Drive tuning
⇒ Additional actions:
● Press the "Adapt strategy" softkey to adapt the default values to a predefined strategy. The
values of the pre-defined strategy are assigned to the user-defined strategy (108). All
parameters can be set in the "User-defined strategy". The tuning objective "Moderate
responsiveness" is the default setting for the "User-defined strategy".
● Press the "Meas. parameters >" softkey to adapt the parameters for a measurement. This
softkey can only be used when selecting the "User-defined strategy".
● Press the "Speed" and "Position" softkeys to toggle between speed controller and position
controller when selecting a strategy.
● "Cancel" and "OK" softkeys to cancel or accept the new settings.

Drive tuning
10.4 Measuring functions (manual tuning)
Explanation of the measuring functions

A range of measuring functions allows the time and frequency response of drives and controls
to be displayed in graphical form on the screen. For this purpose, test signals with an adjustable
interval are connected to the drives.
The measuring functions are located under "Commissioning" → "Optimization/Test". The
current controller, speed controller, and position controller horizontal softkeys provide access
to the dialogs for each corresponding control loop. The screen navigation, screen layout, and
general logic are identical in each of the three areas. The difference between the areas is that
each area on the relevant control loop offers tailored measurements.
Measurement parameters and signal parameters

The test setpoints are adapted to the application in question by means of measurement or
signal parameters, the units of which are determined by the relevant measuring function or
operating mode. The default setting for all parameters is 0.
The measurement or signal parameter units are subject to the following conditions:
Size Unit
Velocity ● Metric system:
Specification in mm/min for translatory or rpm for rotary movements
● Inch system:
Specification in inches for translatory or rpm for rotary movements
Distance ● Metric system:
Specification in mm for translatory or degrees for rotary movements
● Inch system:
Specification in inches for translatory or degrees for rotary movements
Time Specified in ms
Frequency Specified in Hz

Drive tuning
Preconditions for starting measuring functions

To ensure that no erroneous traversing movements due to part programs can be carried out,
the measuring functions have to be started in <JOG> mode.
NOTICE
Avoiding collisions
When traversing movements are carried out within the framework of measuring functions, no
software limit switches and working area limitations are monitored, since these are carried out
in follow-up mode.
Prior to starting traversing movements, the user must therefore ensure that the axes are
positioned such that the traversing limits specified within the framework of the measuring
functions are sufficient to prevent collision with the machine.
Starting measuring functions

Measuring functions initiating a traversing movement are only selected using the specific
softkey. The actual start of the measuring function and thus of the traversing movement is
always carried out with <NC-START> on the machine control panel.
If the main screen of the measuring function is exited without the traversing movement being
initiated, the selection of the traversing function is canceled.
Once the traversing function has been started, the main screen can be exited without any affect
on the traversing movement.
Note
<JOG> mode must be selected when measuring functions are started.
Further safety notices

When using the measuring functions, it must be ensured:
● There are no obstacles in the traversing range.
● The Emergency Stop button is always within reach.
Canceling measuring functions

The following events will cancel active measuring functions:
● Hardware limit switch reached
● Traversing range limits exceeded
● Emergency Stop
● Reset (mode group, channel)
● NC STOP

Drive tuning
● No controller enabling command

● Canceling drive enable
● Canceling traversing enable
● Selection of parking (in position-controlled operation).
● Feed override = 0%
● Spindle override = 50%
● Change in operating mode (JOG) or operating mode JOG not selected
● Actuation of traversing keys
● Actuation of handwheel
● Alarms leading to axis shutdown
10.4.1 Measurement of current control loop
Functionality
The current control loop only needs to be measured for diagnostic purposes if there is a fault
or if there is no standard data for the motor / power unit combination (third-party motor).
For SINAMICS S120, it is possible to measure the input/output behavior of the current control
loop directly in the speed controller without needing to open it. For this reason, measurements
in the speed controller are preferable. The user is made aware of this advantage as red text in
the center of the "Measurement selection" dialog.
The preferred method for measuring the dynamic response of the current controller is the
"Reference frequency response with active speed controller" measuring type. The other
measuring types are only for experts or for comparison measurements of motors not decoupled
from the mechanical components.
NOTICE
Safety measures for hanging/suspended axes
For hanging/suspended axes, measuring the current control loop requires that users apply
special safety measures, for instance:
● Perform the measurement using external weight compensation.
● Perform the measurement without external weight compensation, e.g. by safely and
reliably clamping/locking the drive.

Drive tuning
Measuring method
For the following measuring types, the current setpoint filter is not involved:
Measuring type Measured quantities

Recommended measuring type for experts:
This measuring type is recommended for vertical axes.
● Reference frequency response with Torque-generating current setpoint (input)
active speed controller Torque-generating actual current value (output)
Additional measuring types:
The speed controller is deactivated when measuring the current control loop. This is the reason why a
vertical axis can drop.
● Reference frequency response (after Torque-generating current setpoint (input)
the current setpoint filter) Torque-generating actual current value (output)
● Setpoint step (after the current
setpoint filter)
Measurement
The measurement sequence is divided into the following steps:
1. Set the traversing range monitoring and release logic.
2. Select the measuring type:

Drive tuning
3. Set the parameters: "Meas. parameters >" softkey.

Measurement parameters
– Amplitude: Magnitude of the test signal amplitude.
Given in percent of the peak torque. Values from 1% to 5% are suitable.
– Bandwidth: The frequency range analyzed with the measurement.
The bandwidth depends on the current controller sampling time.
Example: Sample time: 125 μs, bandwidth: 4000 Hz
4. To start the measurement and display the measurement result: "Start measurement"
softkey.
10.4.2 Speed control loop measurement
Functionality
The response characteristics for the motor measurement system are analyzed when
measuring the speed control loop. Various measurement parameter lists are available
depending on the basic measurement setting which has been selected.
The predefined processes for the speed control loop are listed below. As in the current
controller range, the excitation and measurement signals in the speed controller range refer to
the SINAMICS S120 drive. The speed controller measurements differ in terms of the excitation,
which can either be a disturbing torque, a speed setpoint before the filter or a speed setpoint
after the filter. This is comparable with parameter p0480 for values 2, 3 or 5.
A distinction is made in the table between the input node and the excitation point. The input
node only determines which signal is considered as the input for the subordinate system to be
measured.

Drive tuning
Measuring functions
The following measuring functions are available for measuring the speed control loop:
Measuring type Waveform Measured variable (in‐ Measured value (out‐

put) put)
Reference frequency response (af‐ PBRS Speed setpoint after the Actual speed value mo‐
ter the speed setpoint filter) filter tor
Reference frequency response (be‐ PBRS Speed setpoint before Actual speed value mo‐
fore the speed setpoint filter) the filter tor
Setpoint step (after the speed set‐ PBRS ● Speed setpoint after Actual speed value mo‐
point filter) the filter tor
● Actual torque value
Disturbance frequency response PBRS Torque setpoint (func‐ Actual speed value mo‐
(disturbance after the current set‐ tion generator) tor
point filter)
Disturbance variable step (disturb‐ Jump ● Torque setpoint Actual speed value mo‐
ance after the current setpoint filter) (function generator) tor
● Actual torque value
Speed-controlled system (excita‐ PBRS Actual torque value Actual speed value mo‐
tion after the current setpoint filter) tor
Reference frequency response, PBRS Speed setpoint after the Torque-generating ac‐
current control loop filter tual current value
APC open control loop * PBRS Speed setpoint after the APC controller output
filter (r3777[1])
APC closed control loop * PBRS Speed setpoint after the Actual speed value
filter from the direct meas‐
urement system
APC mechanical system * PBRS Actual speed value mo‐ Actual speed value
tor encoder from the direct meas‐
urement system
*)
APC-related inputs appear only when the SINAMICS APC function module is activated. The status of
the APC controller is determined depending on the measurement procedure.

Drive tuning
Measurement sequence
2. Select the measuring type and the measured variable:

Drive tuning
4. To start the measurement and display the measurement result: "Start measurement"
softkey.
In the example shown, the speed control loop has not yet been tuned.
5. A suitable filter parameterization is used to tune the dynamic response. Press the "Active
filter" softkey. The following figure shows the standard settings for a low-pass filter at 1999
Hz:
After using the filter, the following tuned measurement curve results for the speed control
loop:

Drive tuning
10.4.3 Example: Setting the filter for the following error (speed control loop)
Requirement
The X axis is measured with the following settings:
● With feedrates in SD55822[0...5] $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED for step 1 ... 6 and
SD55822[6...8] $SCS_FRICT_OPT_FEED = 0 for step 7 ... 9
● Radius 8 mm in SD55820 $SCS_FRICT_OPT_RADIUS
Measuring the X axis

Procedure:
1. Select the dialog for the tuning via the "NC" and "Friction compensation" softkeys.
2. Select the X axis and press "Start".
3. Confirm the program editor by pressing "OK" without any further inputs. The X axis is not
measured with separate reversal points.
4. Enter a value for step 1 and change the parameters until you are satisfied with the
compensation.

Drive tuning
5. Press "Next >" to change to the next step.
Step 1 of 6: 1,000 mm/min Amplitude: 15.220 mm/min

Decay time: 0.038 s
Active time: 0.012 s
Decay time: 0.034 s
Active time: 0.016 s
6. Repeat this process for all steps. Press "OK" to save the data.
Result
The following graphic shows the characteristic curves of the X axis for various radiuses:
10.4.4 Position control loop measurement
Functionality
The predefined processes for the position control loop are listed in the following table. The
position controller measurements are performed in the NC. The measurements support three
excitation variants: Position setpoint, speed setpoint, torque setpoint and torque feedforward
control. In cases with two configured measuring systems, the selection of the signal output
node supports encoder 1, encoder 2, and the active encoder.
Predefined measuring procedure

The following measuring procedures are available for measuring the position control loop:
Process Curve form Excitation Input signal Output signal

point
Reference frequen‐ PRBS Position set‐ Position setpoint Position actual value
cy response point Position actual value en‐
coder 1
Position actual value en‐
coder 2
Setpoint step Step Position set‐ Position setpoint Position actual value
point System deviation
Contour deviation
Speed actual value
coder 1
coder 2

Drive tuning
Process Curve form Excitation Input signal Output signal

point
Setpoint ramp (rec‐ Ramp Position set‐ Position setpoint Position actual value
ommended) point System deviation
Contour deviation
Speed actual value
coder 1
coder 2
Mechanical fre‐ PRBS Speed setpoint Position actual Position actual value en‐
quency response *) value encoder 1 coder 1
Position actual Position actual value en‐
value encoder 2 coder 1
Disturbance fre‐ PRBS Torque feed‐ Torque feedfor‐ Position actual value
quency response forward control ward control (ex‐ System deviation
citation)
Contour deviation
Speed actual value
coder 1
coder 2
*)
The mechanical frequency response represents the relationship between the motor measuring
system and the direct measuring system, and is measured by the position controller. The selection is
only possible if a second encoder has been detected.

Drive tuning
Measurement sequence
2. Select the measuring type and the measured variable. For example, "Reference frequency
response".

4. To start the measurement: Press the "Measure >" softkey, followed by the "Start
measurement" softkey.
The following figure shows a tuned position control loop in which the servo gain factor has
been adapted with the associated machine data MD32200 $MA_POSCTRL_GAIN.

Drive tuning
10.4.5 Examples for the measuring methods (position control loop)
Measuring type: Reference frequency response

The reference frequency response measurement determines the transfer behavior of the
position controller in the frequency range. The position actual value is taken from the active
measuring system. The setpoint filters, control loop gain and feedforward control must be
parameterized so that resonance is avoided wherever possible over the entire frequency
range.
Measurement parameters:
● Amplitude
This parameter determines the magnitude of the test signal amplitude. It should be set to the
smallest possible value, e.g. 0.01 mm
● Bandwidth
The bandwidth parameter is used to set the analyzed frequency range. The larger this
value, the finer the frequency resolution and the longer the measurement time. The
maximum value is specified by the position controller cycle (Tposition controller):
Bandwidthmax [Hz] = 1 / (2 * Tposition controller [s])
Example:
– Position controller cycle: 2 ms
– Bandwidthmax = 1 / (2 * 2*10-3) = 250 Hz
● Averaging
The accuracy of the measurement and in turn the measurement duration increase with this
value. A value of 4 is normally adequate.
● Settling time
This value represents the delay between recording of the measured data and injection of the
test setpoint and offset. A value of between 0.2 s and 1 s is recommended. Do not set too
low a value for the settling times or the frequency response and phase diagrams will be
distorted.
● Offset
The measurement requires a speed offset of a few motor revolutions per minute. The offset
must be set such that no speed zero crossings occur at the set amplitude, and that the axis
continually moves in one direction.
Measuring type: Setpoint step and setpoint ramp

The transient and the positioning response of the position control in the time domain, and in
particular the effect of setpoint filters, can be assessed with the step and ramp excitation
functions.
Setpoint step:
To avoid overloading the machine mechanical system, for the "Setpoint step" measuring type,
the step amplitude is limited to the following value:
MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
Setpoint ramp:

Drive tuning
3RVLWLRQ
$PSOLWXGH

7LPH
6HWWOLQJWLPH 5LVHWLPH
Solid line At maximum axis acceleration, the velocity changes (almost) according to a
step function.
Dashed line This characteristic corresponds to a realistic, finite value. The offset com‐
ponent is excluded from the display graphic in order to emphasize the tran‐
sient processes.
Figure 10-10 Signal characteristic for position control
With measuring type "Setpoint ramp", the following machine data influences the measurement
result:
● MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
The maximum axis velocity limits the ramp gradient (velocity limitation). The drive does not
reach the programmed end position (amplitude).
● MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL (maximum axis acceleration)
The maximum axis acceleration limits the velocity change (acceleration limitation).
CAUTION
Protection of the machine
In normal cases the machine data corresponds exactly with the load capacity of the machine
kinematics and should not be changed (increased) as part of the measurements:
● MD32000 $MA_MAX_AX_VELO (maximum axis velocity)
● MD32300 $MA_MAX_AX_ACCEL (maximum axis acceleration)
Measurement parameters: Setpoint step and setpoint ramp

The transient and the positioning response of the position control in the time domain, and in
particular the effect of setpoint filters, can be assessed with the step and ramp excitation
functions.
Measurement parameters:
● Amplitude
Determines the amplitude of the specified setpoint step or setpoint ramp.
● Rise time
This parameter determines the period of time to be recorded (maximum 2048 position
controller cycles).

Drive tuning
● Settling time
This value represents the delay between measured data recording / test setpoint output and
the injection of the offset.
● Rise time
The position setpoint is specified with the "Setpoint ramp" basic setting according to the
selected ramp duration.
● Offset
The step is stimulated from standstill or starting from the constant traverse speed set in this
parameter. If an offset value other than zero is input, the test excitation takes place during
the traverse. For the sake of clarity, the displayed position actual value does not include this
constant component.
10.4.6 Function generator
The function generator can be used, for example, to perform the following tasks:
● Measuring and optimizing closed-loop control circuits
● Comparing the dynamic properties of coupled drives
● Specifying a straightforward traversing profile without traversing program
The function generator can be used to generate various signal forms.
In the Servo mode, the setpoint can additionally be supplied into the control structure in
accordance with the currently selected mode, for example, as a current setpoint, disturbing
torque or speed setpoint. Any influence of overlaid closed-loop control circuits is suppressed
automatically.
Position of the application points:
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 6SHHGVHWSRLQW &XUUHQWVHWSRLQW &XUUHQWVHWSRLQW

EHIRUHWKHILOWHU DIWHUWKHILOWHU EHIRUHWKHILOWHU DIWHUWKHILOWHU
6HWSRLQW 6SHHG 6HWSRLQW &XUUHQW &RQ

ILOWHU FRQWUROOHU ILOWHU FRQWURO WUROOHG
)URPWKH OHU V\VWHP

LQWHUSRODWRU
'LVWXUELQJWRUTXH
Figure 10-11 Application points

Drive tuning
To activate the function generator, select "Commissioning" operating area → "Automatic servo
optimization" → "Function generator".
NOTICE
Starting/stopping the function generator
The motion of the drive is not monitored when the function generator is activated.
With the corresponding ramp-function generator parameter settings (e.g. offset), the axis can
traverse to the end stop.
The travel-release drive test can be performed by the PLC with or without active monitoring of
the axis:
● With PLC
● Without PLC
The NC monitors the position and stops the function generator when the axis position goes
beyond the specified upper or lower limit. The scaling can be changed while the function
generator is running.
Operating mode of the function generator for servo and vector:
● Connector output
Operating modes of the function generator only for servo:
● Current setpoint after the filter
● Disturbing torque
● Speed setpoint after the filter
● Current setpoint before the filter
● Speed setpoint before the filter
Periodic or non-periodic signals with different waveforms are generated by the function
generator. The curve parameters vary depending on the signal type.
Connection point System Waveform

● Connector ● Rectangle
● Current setpoint after the filter ● Staircase
● Disturbing torque SINAMICS ● Triangle
● Speed setpoint after the filter ● PRBS (white noise)
● Current setpoint before the filter ● Sinusoidal
● Speed setpoint before the filter
● Position setpoint NC ● Rectangle
● PRBS (white noise)
Further actions:
● "Axis +", "Axis -" or "Direct selection >" softkeys to select the axis on which the signal is
applied (that to be excited).
● "Start" softkey to start the function generator.

Drive tuning
● "Stop" softkey to stop the function generator.

● "Parameter" softkey to adapt the parameter belonging to the connection point.
10.4.7 Example, function generator: Speed setpoint after the filter
Example
Function generator with "Speed setpoint after filter" connection point:
Parameter description for the connection point "speed setpoint after filter":

Drive tuning
The bars in the upper line indicate the traversing path, the actual position and the software limit
switches. The value for the absolute position is displayed in the first line of the table.
● Status indicates whether the axis is referenced, and whether sufficient space is available to
the software limit switch. If the measurement parameter results in an excessively long
traversing distance, so that before the end of the measurement, a software limit switch
would be reached, then this is displayed in color, in the "Status" row:
– "Fault" + red: The measurement is not possible, as the software limit switch would be
passed.
– "Caution" + yellow: The measurement is possible, but there is only a limited distance
remaining.
– "No reference point + yellow: The axis is not referenced, the user must check the
traversing distance.
– "OK" + green: The axis is referenced, and a measurement is possible as the traversing
distance lies within the software limit switch.
● Waveform: Depending on the selection (square wave, staircase, triangular, PBRS,
sinusoidal)
● Amplitude and offset velocity can either be entered as an absolute number or as a
percentage. The amplitude can be specified to be either positive or negative.
– Amplitude: Velocity in [mm/min]
– Amplitude %: Velocity in %
– Offset: Constant velocity in [mm/min]
– Offset %: Constant velocity in %
● Period: In [ms]
● Pulse width: In [ms]
● Ramp-up time: In [ms]
● Upper/lower limit: The limiting of the output signal to the minimum and maximum value can
be set. If the signal characteristic is greater than the upper limit value, the signal is cut off
above the limit.
● Upper/lower limit %:
● Sample time: Time in [ms] until the measurement starts: 0.125 ms (default setting).
Further actions:
● Softkey "<< back", to return to the function generator overview.

Drive tuning
10.5 Define filter
10.5 Define filter
Filter types
The graphical user interface for the display and processing of filters actively available in the
SINAMICS converter can be found under "Active filter":
Filter type Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4

PT1 low pass Time constant --- --- ---
[ms]
PT2 low pass Frequency [Hz] Damping (without --- ---
unit)
General 2nd order Rated frequency Rated damping Counter frequency Counter damping
[Hz] [without unit] [Hz] [without unit]
Band-stop (notch) Notch frequency Band frequency Notch amplitude*) Final amplitude
[Hz] [Hz] [dB] [dB]
Low-pass with re‐ Frequency [Hz] Damping [without Final amplitude ---
duction unit] [dB]
*) A negative value is often set here in order to attain attenuation of the notch frequency.
Automatic generation and representation of frequency response functions (dB amplitude and
degree phase compared to frequency) provides the user with immediate feedback for each
filter parameter. The units for the filter type and the limits for the parameters are defined directly
by the metadata for the corresponding drive parameters.
Example: "Active filters"
Figure 10-12 Example for a speed setpoint filter
"Accept" softkey so that new values are effective in the drive.

Drive tuning
10.6 Circularity test
10.6.1 Circularity test: Function
Benefits
The circularity test serves to set and assess the dynamic response for interpolating axes and
to analyze the contour accuracy on the quadrant transitions (circular contours) achieved by
means of friction compensation. The circularity test is used to check the interpolation of the
axes which work together. This function measures a circle with reference to the motor or to the
direct measuring system. Alignment of the machine-mechanical equipment is not taken into
account in the result. This gives the commissioning engineer the option of separating problems
with the controller tuning from mechanical problems.
The following axis machine data and parameters are checked with this procedure:
● MD32200, MD32400, MD32402, MD32410, MD32490, MD32500, MD32510, MD32520,
MD32540 MD32620, MD32640, MD32810, MD32900, MD32910, MD32930, MD32940
● p1421 bis p1426, p1400, p1433, p1434
The following compensations should be disabled if this procedure is carried out:
● MD32450 backlash compensation
● MD32500 friction compensation
● MD32700 leadscrew error compensation
● MD32710 Enable sag compensation
● MD32750 Temperature compensation type
Note
MD32450 $MA_BACKLASH: Backlash compensation must be adjusted using an external
device, such as a circularity test or gauge.
Example of an NC program to dimension X-Y axes:

FFWON
SOFT
G90 G01 F3000 X400 Y200 Z500
LAB:
G91 G64 G02 X0 Z0 I10
GOTOB LAB
M30
Position, feedrate and active plane must be adjusted to the machine! Alternatively, you can
generate a program using a softkey.

Drive tuning
Result
The best contour results are achieved when the circular form test results are in the correct
actual size, shape and minimum p/p deviation between a combined interpolation of the axes (X-
Y, X-Z, Y-Z).
An NC program in the MDA operating mode and the circularity test function are used to
measure and evaluate these results. The "worst case" of a circle radius and the path velocity
must lead to a realistic radial acceleration of which the machine is capable.
Circularity tests of machine manufacturers usually use a radius of 100 mm or 150 mm with
feedrate speeds that are determined by the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer
determines the specifications for an acceptable result.
High-speed processes generally have higher requirements for testing circles with high-speed
milling machines and can range from circle radii of 10 - 25 mm and feedrates of 5 - 10 m/min.
For high-speed milling machines, the results are generally acceptable if the P/P deviation
≤ 0.010 mm and the actual size of the circle is equal to the programmed radius – or in the worst-
case scenario – to the path velocity.
10.6.2 Circularity test: Performing the measurement
Setting parameters
Figure 10-13 Circularity test - measurement

Drive tuning
Enter the following parameters to carry out a measurement:

● "Measurement": Selection of the two axes that are intended to be measured and selection
of the measurement system. Parked encoders are not displayed for selection.
● "Parameter": The parameter settings in the "Radius" and "Feed" input fields must
correspond to the values from the part program that controls the circular motion of the axes,
taking account of the feed override switch setting.
● "Representation": Parameters for displaying the graphics
– "Resolution" (scaling) of the diagram axes in [mm/scaled]
– "Display" via the mean radius or programmed radius
Perform measurement
Procedure:
1. In the "Commissioning" operating area select the "Optim./test" softkey → "Circularity test"
softkey.
2. Select the axes that are intended to be measured with the <SELECT> key or with the "Axis
+"/"Axis -" softkeys.
3. Set the parameters for the measurement: "Radius" and "Feed"
The "Measurement time" display field shows the measurement time calculated from the
"Radius" and "Feed" values for recording the actual position values during the circular
movement:
If the measurement time is not sufficient then only parts of the circle are portrayed. The
measurement time can be increased by reducing the feed value. This also applies if the
circularity test is started from the stationary condition.
4. Set the parameters for displaying the graphic:
If the measurement time calculated from this exceeds the time range that can be displayed
(maximum measurement time = position controller cycle frequency * 2048), an appropriate
sample time is calculated for recording (n * position controller cycle frequency), so that a
complete circle can be displayed.
5. To automatically generate a program, with which you traverse the selected axes, press
softkey "Generate circle program". The program is displayed for checking purposes and
must be confirmed. Ensure that the axes can be traversed according to the program and that
the traversing paths are free.
6. To start the measurement, press the "Start" softkey. The softkeys cannot be used while the
measurement is being performed - with the exception of the "Stop" softkey.

Drive tuning
Displaying a graphic
To display the measurement result as a graphic, press the "Graphic" softkey.
Figure 10-14 Circularity test - display
● Press softkey "Full screen" to display the graphic on a full screen.
If the active "Full screen" softkey is activated a second time, you will return to the previous
display with graphic and display information.
● Press the "Tuning" softkey to carry out additional tuning adaptations. On a new softkey bar,
you can navigate directly to the following areas:
– "Service axis" in the operating area "Diagnostics"
– "Axis machine data"
– "Drive machine data"
– "User views"
● To start the measurement, press the "Start" softkey.
● To stop the measurement, press the "Stop" softkey.
● Press the "Load" softkey to display parameters or the graphic of a measurement.
● Press the "Save" softkey to save parameters or the graphic of a measurement.
The graphic can be saved as a pixel graphic in the PNG or BMP format. The measurement
data are saved in the xml format as *.sud. The following path is set as default path: user/
sinumerik/hmi/log/optimization/circular
● With softkey "<< Back", you return to dialog "Circularity test - measurement".
10.6.3 Circularity test: Examples
The MD32400 $MC_AX_JERK_ENABLE axial jerk limitation is set via a time constant and is
always active.

Drive tuning
Machine data for setpoint filter:

● MD32402 $MC_AX_JERK_MODE = Type 2 is recommended, type 1 is preset for
compatibility reasons. Parameterizing a pure band-stop filter is expressly not
recommended.
● MD32402 $MA_AX_JERK_MODE (filter type) and MD32410 $MA_AX_JERK_TIME > 0 is
effective only if MD32400 $MA_AX_JERK_ENABLE = 1 is set.
Example 1 for optimization

Machine data after optimization of the axes:
Parameters / machine data X axis Z axis

MD32200 $MC_POSCTRL_GAIN 8.500 8.500
p1460 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN1 3.01 3.89
p1462 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 6.18 6.18
p1463 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ 106.3 106.3
p1440 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS 0 0
MD32610 $MC_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT 1.0 1.0
MD32620 $MC_FFW_MODE 4 4
MD32810 $MC_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0.0022 0.0022
MD32400 $MC_AX_JERK_ENABLE 0 0
The actual value of the radius is generally too large with optimized feed precontrol. This can be
corrected with the MD32410 $MC_AX_JERK_TIME time constant. Use a time constant in all
axes if required.
This circle displays the results after the feed precontrol has been optimized. However, the
mean radius is 0,0019 mm too large:
X1: active measuring system Parameter

Z1: active measuring system Radius: 10.00000 mm
Feedrate: 3000.00000 mm/min
Measure‐ 1257 ms
ment time:
X1: active measuring system
Z1: active measuring system
Representation
Resolution: 0.01000 mm
Display of. mean radius
Radius: 10.00190 mm
Delta R: 4.02698 μm

MD32200 $MC_POSCTRL_GAIN 8.500 8.500
p1460 SPEEDCTRL_GAIN1 3.01 3.89
p1462 SPEEDCTRL_INTEGRATOR_TIME_1 6.18 6.18

Drive tuning

p1463 SPEEDCTRL_REF_MODEL_FREQ 106.3 106.3
p1440 NUM_SPEED_FILTERS 0 0
MD32610 $MC_VELO_FFW_WEIGHT 1.0 1.0
MD32620 $MC_FFW_MODE 3 3
MD32810 $MC_EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME 0.0022 0.0022
MD32402 $MC_AX_JERK_MODE 2 2
MD32410 $MC_AX_JERK_TIME 0.012 0.012

This circle shows the effect of a slightly different time constant for the axial jerk filter. The time
constant is adapted in order to correct this type of error:

MD32410 $MC_AX_JERK_TIME 0.012 0.0125

Measurement 1257 ms
time:
Representation
Representation: mean radius
Radius: 10.00029 mm

This circle shows the effect of a significantly different time constant for the axial jerk filter. The
time constant is adapted in order to correct this type of error:

MD32410 $MC_AX_JERK_TIME 0.015 0.012

Drive tuning

Measurement 1257 ms
time:
Representation
Representation: mean radius
Radius: 9.98971 mm
10.6.4 Circularity test: Saving data
Backing up measurement data

The file is structured as follows (with comments in brackets[ ]):
H: CstPic [Identifier for circularity test graphic]
V: 5.0 [Version number of the file format]
@ parameters
P 1: 10 [Radius]
P 2: 3000 [Feed]
P 3: 1257 [Measuring time]
P 4: 0 [Measuring system Axis 1 - 0: active; 1:first; 2: second]
P 5: 0 [Measuring system Axis 2 - 0: active; 1:first; 2: second]
@Representation
P 10: 10 [Resolution]
P 11: 8 [8 = mean R ; 9 = prog. radius]
P 12: X1 [Axis name 1]
P 13: Z1 [Axis name 2]
@Intermediate values
P 20: 15.6632 [max. radius measured values]
P 21: 10.9326 [min. radius measured values]
P 22: 13.6694 [mean radius measured values]
P 23: 1886 [Number of measured values]

Drive tuning
@Additional values
P 30: 1000 [Accuracy (1/P30))
@Physical units
P 40: 5370 [Text number radius unit]
P 41: 5381 [Text number feed unit]
P 42: 6165 [Text number Resolution unit]
P 43: 5346 [Text number DeltaRadius unit]
P 44: 0 [New: Operate: Basislengthunit]
@Abscissa
Ai: [Abscissa values i : 0..P23]
@Ordinate
Oi: [Ordinate values i : 0..P23]
@Radius
Ri: [Radius values i : 0..P23]

Drive tuning
10.7 Decision-making support for APC and APC ECO
Conditions for Advanced Position Control

There is a vibration on the load side of the axis (carriage, table) in the axis direction:
● The vibration is excited by the axis motion.
● The vibration is excited by the machining process (e.g. milling, first cut).
Software option
"Advanced Position Control" (6FC5800-0AM13-0YB0)
Criteria for Advanced Position Control

The vibration could also be reduced by a weaker speed controller:
p1460 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower Increase P gain

p1462 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed, lower Reduce integral time Tn
The noise suppression and dynamic behavior of the closed-loop controller worsens with a weak
speed controller. Disturbance variables, such as friction, then occur more often, especially with
reversing behavior (the quadrant on the circle worsens), and marks become visible on the
workpiece. Use the Advanced Position Control to find a compromise between noise
suppression and oscillation damping.
Conditions for Advanced Position Control ECO

The vibration could also be reduced by a weaker speed controller:
p1460 Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower Increase P gain

p1462 Speed controller integral time adaptation speed, lower Reduce integral time Tn
This is, for example, possible if the gear factor is small or the spindle pitch is at least 10 mm.
Software option
"Advanced Position Control ECO" (6FC5800-0AM12-0YB0)
Criteria for Advanced Position Control ECO

If the above-mentioned conditions are fulfilled, perform the following steps:
1. Configure Advanced Position Control ECO to identify the frequency of the vibration: Approx.
30% accuracy is adequate.
2. Oscillation damping: Enter frequency, activate Advanced Position Control ECO and then
check the vibration response on the load side.

Drive tuning
If the oscillation reduction is not effective, another mode can be activated which can specifically
compensate machine base-related oscillation.
It is recommended first to deactivate the oscillation damping of junction ② and to activate the
APC filter for the machine base-related oscillation.
If the filters for the machine base-related oscillation are also ineffective, the causes may be:
1. The vibration does not occur in the axis direction.
2. The vibration cannot be measured on the motor.
3. The vibration is not measured with Advanced Position Control ECO.
For a machine equipped with SINUMERIK 840D sl and a second measuring system for the
axis, it is recommended to install the Advanced Position Control function module with two
encoders.
Decision-making support
When is Advanced Position Control needed with a second encoder?
● If the damping achieved by "Advanced Position Control ECO" is inadequate.
● If the motor cannot attenuate the vibration - even with a weak speed controller.
Possible reasons:
● The leadscrew pitch is too small, e.g. 5 mm
● The Gear factor motor/load revolutions is very high, e.g. p0433 ≥ 30
● The drive train has too much self-locking.
● The Tool Center Point is so far from the motor that the vibrations can only be measured by
a nearby direct measuring system.

Drive tuning

Saving and managing data 11
11.1 Saving data
Time of the data backup

The following times are recommended for performing a data backup:
● After commissioning
● After changing machine-specific settings
● After replacing a hardware component
● Before a software upgrade
● Before the activation of memory-configuring machine data
Creating and importing a commissioning archive

In order to create and import a commissioning archive of the type "*.arc", select the softkey "IBN
Archive":
● Creating a commissioning archive
● Creating a PLC hardware upgrade archive (only SDBs)
● Importing a commissioning archive
● Creating an original status archive
● Reading in an original status archive

Saving and managing data
11.1 Saving data
What data is saved?
Components data
NC data ● 3D collision model
● Compile cycles
● Cycles
– User cycles
– Manufacturer cycles
– Standard cycles
● Definitions
● NC active data
– User data (GUD, LUD)
– Machine data
– Compensation data (measuring system error compensation,
friction compensation, sag / angularity error compensation)
– Zero offsets
– Option data
– R parameters
– Protection zones
– Setting data
– Tool and magazine data
– Initialization program (INI)
● Part programs
● Subprograms
● Workpieces
● Comments
NC data with compensation Note: It only makes sense to archive machine-specific compensation
data data if the commissioning file is reloaded into the same controller.
NC data with compile cycles The compile cycles ( * .elf) option is displayed only if compile cycles are
also available.
PLC data ● OB (organization blocks)
● FB (function blocks)
● FC (functions)
● DB (data blocks)
● SFB (system function blocks)
● SFC (system functions)
● SDB (system data blocks).
Note: System data blocks are only used to back up the hardware config‐
uration (not the programming logic).

11.1 Saving data
Components data
Drive data ● Binary or ASCII format
● Extended selection: Drive units
HMI data ● Applications: User, manufacturer
● Data backups: Commissioning data, network topology
● Easy Extend
● Settings
● Help
● PLC project
● Reports: Action log, screenshots etc.
● Safety Integrated (acceptance test)
● Texts
● Version data
● Templates
● Dictionaries: For Chinese simplified and Chinese traditional (IME)
11.1.1 Backup of PLC data
PLC operating state

When creating a commissioning archive with PLC data, the PLC image that is saved during this
process depends on the operating state of the PLC at the time of creation:
● Original image
● Instantaneous image
● Inconsistent image
The operating state of the PLC can be changed in the following ways:
● With SIMATIC STEP 7 Manager
● With the PLC mode selector on the NCU:
Position " 2" → STOP, position " 0" → RUN
Operating sequence for original image

The original image of the PLC is represented by the PLC-data state immediately after loading
the S7 project into the PLC.
1. Set the PLC to the STOP operating state.
2. Load the appropriate S7 project into the PLC using SIMATIC Manager STEP 7.
3. Create a commissioning archive with PLC data.
4. Set the PLC to the RUN operating state.

11.1 Saving data
Operating sequence for instantaneous image

If you cannot create an original image, you can save an instantaneous image as an alternative.
1. Set the PLC to the STOP operating state.
2. Archive the PLC data.
3. Set the PLC to the RUN operating state.
Operating sequence for inconsistent image

An inconsistent image results if a commissioning file with PLC data is created and the PLC is
in the RUN state (cyclic operation). The data blocks of the PLC are saved at different times with
contents that have changed in the meanwhile. This may result in a data inconsistency that,
once the data backup has been copied back to the PLC, may under certain circumstances
result in a PLC stop in the PLC program.
NOTICE
Ensure data consistency
The creation of a commissioning file with PLC data while the PLC is in RUN state (cyclic
operation) may result in an inconsistent PLC image in the commissioning archive. After this
commissioning archive has been copied back, the data inconsistency in the PLC program may
under certain circumstances result in a PLC stop.
11.1.2 Creating a commissioning archive
Requirement
The following access levels are required:
● In order to create a commissioning archive, at least access level 4 (key-operated switch 3)
is required.
● In order to import a commissioning archive, at least access level 2 (service) is required.
It is not permissible that the default setting in MD11230 $MN_MD_FILE_STYLE is changed in
order to guarantee that a commissioning file with access level 2 (service) can be read in:
Generate line checksum and MD numbers.
To prevent a topology error, Control Unit parameter p9906 (topology comparison level of all
components) should be set to "Medium" in order to import a commissioning archive.
Creating a commissioning archive

Series commissioning means bringing a series of control systems to the same initial state as
regards their data. A commissioning archive contains NC, PLC, drive and HMI data.
Compensation data of the NC can also be optionally saved. For a data backup, the drive data
is saved as binary data that cannot be read.

11.1 Saving data
Procedure:
1. To create a commissioning archive, select: "Commissioning" operating area → forward key
→ "Commissioning archives" → "Creating a commissioning archive" option:
2. Select the data to be backed up:

– NC data: With/without compensation data
– PLC data
– Drive data: Binary/ASCII
– HMI data: All/selection
3. Enter an archive name.
4. The following directories are offered as a storage location for the archive:
– Archive/user or Archive/manufacturer
Absolute path specification: /user/sinumerik/data/archive or /oem/sinumerik/data/
archive
– All configured logical drives (USB, network drives)
Note
USB FlashDrive
USB FlashDrives are not suitable as persistent memory media.

11.2 Managing data
11.2 Managing data
Application
The "Manage data" function is used to support and simplify the commissioning and provides
functions for backup, load and comparison of machine, setting, compensation and drive data.
In contrast to a commissioning archive, only a single control object (axis, channel, servo,
infeed, etc.) is saved in ASCII format (*.TEA). This file can be edited and transferred to other
control objects of the same type. The "Manage data" function is also the basis for copying DO
for SINAMICS drives.
Managing data
The "Manage data" function offers the following options:
● Transfer data within the controller
● Save data to a file
● Load data in a file
● Compare data
The function is called from "Commissioning" → "Machine data" → "Manage data".
Example of "Transfer data within the controller":
The following data can be saved and stored under the following absolute path on the
CompactFlash card:
● user/sinumerik/hmi/data/backup/ec for compensation data
● user/sinumerik/hmi/data/backup/md for machine data
● user/sinumerik/hmi/data/backup/sd for setting data
● user/sinumerik/hmi/data/backup/snx for SINAMICS parameters

11.2 Managing data
11.2.1 How to transfer data within the controller
Transfer data within the control
NOTICE
For safety reasons, the machine and setting data should only be transferred when the enable
is locked.
Procedure:
1. Select the "Transfer data within the control" option.
2. Select the source data in the data structure and confirm with "OK".
3. In the drop-down list, select an object, e.g. a different axis or a different drive object, to which
you want to transfer the data and confirm with "OK".
4. Observe the safety instructions and check the enable signals at the machine and the drive.
5. For drive data, the "Load" softkey is used to transfer the data to the target object.
11.2.2 To save and load data
Save data to a file

Procedure:
1. Select the "Save data to a file" option.
2. In the data structure, select the data that you want to save to a file and confirm with "OK".
3. Select as the storage location, a directory or a USB storage medium and enter a name.
Note
SINAMICS parameters
An ASCII file (*.TEA) is always generated when saving.
Three files of the following type are generated when saving the drive data:
● A binary file (*.ACX) that cannot be read.
● An ASCII file (*.TEA) that can be read or edited in the ASCII editor.
● A log file (*.log) that contains message texts (error situation) or is empty (successful
storage).

11.2 Managing data
Loading data from a file
NOTICE
For safety reasons, the machine and setting data should only be transferred when the enable
is locked.
Procedure:
1. Select the "Load data from a file" option.
2. In the data structure, select the saved file and confirm with "OK".
3. In the drop-down list, select an object, e.g. a different axis or a different drive object, to which
you want to transfer the data and confirm with "OK".
4. Observe the safety instructions and check the enable signals at the machine and the drive.
5. For drive data, the "Load" softkey is used to transfer the data to the target object.
11.2.3 How to compare data
Compare data
Select the data sources to compare the data. For instance, compare the actual data in the
control system with data saved in a file.
Procedure:
1. Select the "Compare data" option.
2. In the data structure, select the data that you want to compare.
3. Press the "Add to list" softkey to transfer the data to the list in the lower area of the display.
4. Press the "Delete from list" softkey to remove the data again.
5. If the list contains more than two data objects, you can activate the checkbox to compare two
or more data objects from the list.
6. Press the "Compare" softkey to start the comparison. The display of the comparison results
can take some time for extensive parameter lists.
7. Press the "Legend" softkey to display or hide the legend. The following display is the default:
– Different parameters are displayed.
– Parameters that do not exist in both data sources, are displayed.
– The same parameters are not displayed.

11.2 Managing data
11.2.4 Example: Importing/exporting SINAMICS lists
Overview of SINAMICS lists

The following data are processed using the Import/export SINAMICS lists options:
● Motor data list of a "third-party motor" (= not a Siemens motor)
● Valve data list of a SINAMICS S120 Hydraulic Linear Actor Module
Example: Importing/exporting data lists

Import procedure:
1. Select the "Import SINAMICS lists" option to import a list from a USB storage medium.
2. The file name of the valve data list is not relevant. When importing, the file is copied with this
name to the following target folder:
Valve data list: /user/siemens/sinumerik/hmi/cfg/slsuhlvlvs.ini
3. The file name of the motor data list is not relevant. When importing, the file is copied under
the associated name to the folder of the selected CU_I or CU_NX
Motor data list for an induction rotation motor: ../motarm.acx
If a motor data list is already available, a prompt asks whether it should be overwritten.
Procedure for exporting a valve data list:
1. Select the option "Export SINAMICS lists".
2. The archive location for the list is selected automatically.
3. Before copying, you can select a new file name when selecting the target folder.

11.2 Managing data

New installation / upgrading 12
12.1 With the help of an NCU service system
Introduction
The CNC software on the CompactFlash card can be newly installed or upgraded.
● A reinstallation is required if there is no CNC software on the CompactFlash card (see
Section New installation (Page 351)).
● An upgrade is required if an older CNC software is available on the CompactFlash card (see
Chapter Upgrading (Page 358))
Tools for reinstallation/upgrade

You can perform a reinstallation/upgrade using the following tools:
● Access MyMachine /P2P
● WinSCP and VNC Viewer
For a reinstallation/upgrade, you require a bootable USB FlashDrive as an NCU service
system.
Literature
"Generate Service System" section in the Operating System NCU (IM7) (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/109481527/en) Commissioning Manual
12.1.1 New installation
Introduction
No CNC software was installed on the CompactFlash Card. The CompactFlash Card is empty.
You have the following options of initiating a new installation of the CNC software:
● Automatic installation using USB-FlashDrive
● Installation using USB-FlashDrive
● Installation using WinSCP on PG/PC
● Installation using VNC Viewer on PG/PC

New installation / upgrading
12.1.1.1 Automatic installation of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive
Flow diagram
$XWRPDWLFLQVWDOODWLRQRI
WKH&1&VRIWZDUHE\
86%IODVKGULYH 6,01&.!
3/&!
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYHLQWR
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH1&8 1&8 ;
VHUYLFHV\VWHPRQ86%
IODVKGULYH
1&83RZHU21
,V86%IODVKGULYHDYDLODEOH !5'</('IODVKHVJUHHQ
ZLWK1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP" 1R DSSUR[bV
<HV
2SHQ:LQGRZV 5'</('UHG"
([SORUHU
6HHHUURUFDXVHLQ
WKHDXWRH[HFORJILOH
1R
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYHLQWR HJ&RPSDFW)ODVK
3&3* 3DWKRQGHOLYHU\'9' FDUGWRRVPDOO
?9ROBKPLVO?VWDQGDUG H[SRUW ?
HPHUJHQF\BERRWV\VBQFX? 1R
VZBXSGDWH?DXWRH[HFVK 5'</('2))"
&RS\DXWRH[HFVK
DQGFQFVZ!WJ]WR <HV
86%IODVKGULYH URRW 1&83RZHU2))
IROGHU
5HPRYH86%IODVKGULYH
5HQDPH
6,01&.!
FQFVZ!WJ]
3/&!
WRIXOOWJ]
1&83RZHU21
5HPRYH86%IODVK
GULYH
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
1&83RZHU2)) 6,01&.!
3/&!
1&8
3RZHU2))" 1R
(1'
Figure 12-1 Automatic installation using USB-FlashDrive

12.1.1.2 Installation of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive
Flow diagram
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH
&1&VRIWZDUH
XVLQJ86%IODVK
GULYH
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH
1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP
RQ86%IODVKGULYH
86%IODVKGULYH
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8 1R
VHUYLFHV\VWHP
2SHQ:LQGRZV
([SORUHU
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH
LQWR3&3*
1RWLFH)LOHQDPHRI
FQFVZ!WJ]ORZHUFDVH
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ] RQO\
WR86%IODVKGULYH
URRWIROGHU
5HPRYH86%IODVK ,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYHLQWR
GULYH 1&8 ;
1&83RZHU2)) 6\VWHP
1R 6\VWHP3&8"
7&8"
1&83RZHU
1R
2))" &RQQHFWWKHVWDQGDUG3&
NH\ERDUGWRWKH86%)URQWRI
3&8RU23[
6,01&.! 6,01&.!
3/&! 3/&!

Figure 12-2 Installing the control software using USB-FlashDrive

Flow diagram - installation of the system TCU (1) continued

1&83RZHU2))
5HPRYH86%IODVK
1&83RZHU21 GULYH
0DLQ0HQX) 6,01&.!
5HVWRUH1&86RIWZDUH 3/&!
)5HFRYHUIURP86% 1&83RZHU21
)5HFRYHUV\VWHP 3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
IURPVHOHFWHGILOH
6,01&.!
)2.FRQWLQXH 3/&!
)WRFRQILUP ,QSXW7&8QDPH
,3DGGUHVV
1R
'LVSOD\6\QFLQJ
GLVNGRQH"
(1'
Figure 12-3 Installing the control software using USB-FlashDrive - continued (TCU system)

Flow diagram - installation of the system PCU (2) continued
&RQQHFW3&8;[[[!
1&8;
1&83&8
3RZHU21
%RRW3&8LQVHUYLFHPRGH :;3
NH\!PDQXIDFWXUHUSDVVZRUG

6WDUW:LQ6&3 6WDUW91&YLHZHU
GHVNWRSLFRQ GHVNWRSLFRQ
&RQQHFWWR

0DLQ0HQX)
5HVWRUH1&86RIWZDUH
/RJLQWR
ZLWKXVHUDGPLQ
3DVVZRUG6815,6( )5HFRYHUIURP86%
)5HFRYHUV\VWHP
IURPVHOHFWHGILOH
0HQX&RPPDQGV
!2SHQWHUPLQDO
)2.FRQWLQXH
$Q\GDWDRQWKH&RPSDFW 3RVVLEOHHUURU
)ODVKFDUGDUHGHOHWHG VF(5525XQNQRZQRSWLRQ )WRFRQILUP
IXOOGDWDFQFVZ!WJ]
&DXVH6SDFHPLVVLQJEHWZHHQ
,QSXWVFUHVWRUHIXOO IXOODQGGDWD
GDWDFQFVZ!WJ] 'LVSOD\6\QFLQJGLVN
GRQH" 1R
SURPSW
UHDSSHDUV" 1R 1&83RZHU2))
6,01&.!
5HPRYH86%IODVKGULYH
3/&!
6,01&.!
3/&!
(1'
1&83RZHU21
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
Figure 12-4 Installing the control software using USB-FlashDrive - continued (PCU system)

12.1.1.3 Installation of the CNC software using WinSCP on PC/PG
Flow diagram
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH&1&
VRIWZDUHXVLQJ:LQ6&3
RQ3&3*
GDWDFRUUHVSRQGVWRWKH
86%IODVKGULYHRQ1&8;
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH
,V86%IODVKGULYH $Q\GDWDRQWKH&)FDUGDUH
1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8VHUYLFH GHOHWHG
1R RQ86%IODVKGULYH
V\VWHP"
3RVVLEOHHUURU6F(5525
XQNQRZQRSWLRQ
IXOOGDWDFQFVZ!WJ]
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ]WR ,QSXWVFUHVWRUHIXOOGDWDFQF &DXVH6SDFHPLVVLQJ

86%IODVKGULYH URRW VZ!WJ] EHWZHHQIXOODQGGDWD
IROGHU
1&83RZHU2))
1&83RZHU2))"
1R 'LVSOD\6\QFLQJGLVN
GRQH" 1R
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYHLQWR
1&8 ; 1&83RZHU2))
&RQQHFW1&8 ; ! 5HPRYH

3&3* 86%IODVKGULYH
1&83:521 6,01&.!
,IDFRQQHFWLRQLVQRW
3/&!
HVWDEOLVKHGGHDFWLYDWHDQG
WKHQUHDFWLYDWH/RFDO$UHD
6WDUW:LQ6&3RQ3&3* &RQQHFWLRQXQGHU1HWZRUN
FRQQHFWLRQV 1&83RZHU21
/RJLQWR 3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
ZLWKXVHUDGPLQ
SDVVZRUG6815,6(
6,01&.!
3/&!
0HQX&RPPDQGV!
2SHQWHUPLQDO
(1'
Figure 12-5 Installation using WinSCP on PG/PC

12.1.1.4 Installation of the CNC software using VNC Viewer on PC/PG
Flow diagram
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH&1&
VRIWZDUHXVLQJ91&
9LHZHURQ3&3*
0DLQ0HQX)
5HVWRUH1&86RIWZDUH
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH )5HFRYHUIURP86%
,V86%IODVKGULYH
1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8
1R RQ86%IODVKGULYH
VHUYLFHV\VWHP" )5HFRYHUV\VWHP
IURPVHOHFWHGILOH
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ] )2.FRQWLQXH
WR86%IODVKGULYH
URRWIROGHU
)WRFRQILUP
1&83RZHU2))
'LVSOD\6\QFLQJGLVN
1&83RZHU GRQH" 1R
2))" 1R
1&83RZHU2))
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH
LQWR1&8 ;
5HPRYH86%IODVK
GULYH
&RQQHFW1&8 ; !
3&3*
6,01&!
3/&!
1&83RZHU21
1&83RZHU21
6WDUW91&9LHZHURQ
3&3*
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
,IDFRQQHFWLRQLVQRWHVWDEOLVKHG
91&VHUYHULQSXW 6,01&!
GHDFWLYDWHDQGWKHQUHDFWLYDWH
3/&!
/RFDO$UHD&RQQHFWLRQXQGHU
1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLRQV
(1'
Figure 12-6 Installation using VNC Viewer on PG/PC

12.1.2 Upgrading
Upgrade options
You have the following options of upgrading the CNC software:
● Automatic upgrade using USB-FlashDrive
● Upgrade using USB-FlashDrive
● Upgrade using WinSCP on PG/PC
● Upgrade using VNC Viewer on PG/PC
Note
An upgrade is possible as of CNC software 2.xx. An upgrade from other software versions
is not permitted. In this case, a new installation is required.
Before the upgrade, you can backup the complete CompactFlash card. Using Restore, you
can write back this backup to the CompactFlash card.
Data backup before upgrades

Carry out a data backup before each upgrade:
● Commissioning archive of NC/PLC/drive data
● Load the PLC project into the PC/PG (STEP 7)
● License key
When the software is upgraded, all user data is kept on the CompactFlash card in the
directories /user, /addon, /oem. The license key is kept as well.
Prior to overwriting a licensed CompactFlash card, a backup of the license key is absolutely
necessary. The key is available in file ‘keys.txt’ and is stored under the path keys/sinumerik.
The backup of the key can be performed, for example, with WinSCP, from the PG/PC.
Note
The licenses are permanently assigned to the CompactFlash card (card ID) and can only be
used on this card.
The license key can be read back via Web License Manager (Page 41) using the card number.
Automatic upgrading
For an automatic upgrade with autoexec.sh from the USB-FlashDrive, the CompactFlash card
is first backed up.
The backup file "card_img.tgz" is saved under the following directory:
/machines/[machine name+serial number of the CompactflashCard]

An existing data backup is not overwritten. In this case, the operation is exited with an error. The
upgrade is made once the backup has been successfully completed.
12.1.2.1 Backup/Restore
Introduction
Before the upgrade, you can backup the complete CompactFlash Card. Using Restore, you
can write back this backup to the CompactFlash Card.

Automatic backup of the complete CompactFlash Card
Flow diagram
$XWRPDWLFEDFNXSRI
WKHFRPSOHWH
6,01&.!
&RPSDFW)ODVK&DUG
3/&!
,QVHUW86%)ODVK'ULYHLQ1&8
;
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH1&8
VHUYLFHV\VWHPRQWKH
86%)ODVK'ULYH
1&83RZHU21
86%)ODVK'ULYHZLWK
1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP
!5'</('IODVKHVJUHHQ
! 1R DSSUR[VHFRQGV
DYDLODEOH"
<HV
2SHQ:LQGRZV 5'</('UHG"
([SORUHU
6HHHUURUFDXVHLQ
WKHDXWRH[HFORJILOH
3DWKRQGHOLYHU\'9'
1R HJ&RPSDFW)ODVK
,QVHUW86%)ODVK'ULYHLQ
3&3* ?9ROBKPLVO?VWDQGDUG H[SRUW &DUGWRRVPDOO
?HPHUJHQF\BERRWV\VBQFX?VZB
XSGDWH?DXWRH[HFVK
1R
&RS\DXWRH[HFVKWR
5'</('2))"
86%)ODVK'ULYH URRW
GLUHFWRU\
<HV
FDUGBLPJWJ]
EDFNXSILOHFUHDWHG
5HPRYH86%
RQ86%)ODVK'ULYH
)ODVK'ULYH
1&83RZHU2))
1&83RZHU2))
5HPRYH86%
1&8 )ODVK'ULYH
3RZHU
2))"
1R
6,01&.!
3/&!
(1'
Figure 12-7 Automatic backup of the complete CompactFlash Card

Automatic restoration of the complete CompactFlash Card
Flow diagram
$XWRPDWLFUHVWRUDWLRQ 6,01&.!
RIWKHFRPSOHWH
&RPSDFW)ODVK&DUG
3/&!
,QVHUW86%)ODVK'ULYHLQ
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH
1&8 ;
1&8VHUYLFH
V\VWHPRQWKH86% 1&83RZHU21
)ODVK'ULYH
!5'</('IODVKHV
86%)ODVK'ULYHZLWK1&8 JUHHQ DSSUR[
VHUYLFHV\VWHP ERRWVWLFN VHFRQGV
DYDLODEOH"
1R
<HV
5'</('UHG"
2SHQ:LQGRZV 6HHHUURUFDXVHLQ
([SORUHU WKHDXWRH[HFORJILOH
1R HJ&RPSDFW)ODVK
3DWKRQGHOLYHU\'9'
?9ROBKPLVO?VWDQGDUG &DUGWRRVPDOO
,QVHUW86%
)ODVK'ULYHLQ H[SRUW ?HPHUJHQF\BERRWV\VB
3&3* QFX?VZBXSGDWH?DXWRH[HFVK
5'</('2))" 1R
&RS\DXWRH[HFVK
WR86%)ODVK'ULYH <HV
URRWGLUHFWRU\
1&83RZHU2))
FDUGBLPJWJ]LVWKHEDFNXS
ILOHFUHDWHGZLWK%DFNXS 5HPRYH86%
&RS\FDUGBLPJBWJ] &RPSDFW)ODVK&DUG )ODVK'ULYH
WR86%)ODVK'ULYH
URRWGLUHFWRU\
6,01&.!
3/&!
5HQDPH
FDUGBLPJWJ]DV 3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
IXOOWJ]
5HPRYH86% /RDG1&3/&GULYH
)ODVK'ULYH DUFKLYH
1&83RZHU2)) 6,01&.!
3/&!
1&83RZHU
2))" 1R
(1'
Figure 12-8 Automatic restoration of the complete CompactFlash Card

12.1.2.2 Automatic upgrade of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive
Flow diagram
$XWRPDWLFXSJUDGHRIWKH
&1&VRIWZDUHXVLQJ86%
IODVKGULYH 6,01&ැ
3/&ැ
&UHDWH1&3/&GULYH
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH
DUFKLYHRQ&RPSDFW)ODVK
LQWR1&8 ;
FDUGDQGRU86%IODVK YLDSDWFKFDEOH 5-
GULYH WR1&8;
,3 1&83RZHU21
/RDG3/&SURMHFWWR
3&3* 67(3 2QO\LIQHZ7RROER[
QHFHVVDU\ 5'</('IODVKHV
JUHHQ DSSUR[bV
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH1&8
VHUYLFHV\VWHPRQ
86%IODVKGULYH <HV
,V86%IODVKGULYH 5'</('UHG"
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8
1R (UURUFDXVHLQWKH
VHUYLFHV\VWHP"
DXWRH[HFORJILOH HJ
1R
&RPSDFW)ODVKFDUG
WRRVPDOO
2SHQ:LQGRZV
([SORUHU
5'</('2))"
1R
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH 3DWKRQGHOLYHU\'9'
LQWR3&3* 9ROBKPLVO?VWDQGDUG
1&83RZHU2))
?HPHUJHQF\BERRWV\VBQFX? 1HZ7RROER["
1R
&RS\DXWRH[HFVK VZBXSGDWH?DXWRH[HFVK
5HPRYH86%IODVK
DQGFQFVZ!WJ]WR
GULYH
86%IODVKGULYH URRW
2SHQ 67(3 3/&
IROGHU
6,01&ැ SURMHFW7RROER[
3/&ැ ES[B[[
5HQDPH 1&83RZHU21 &RS\QHZEORFNV

QFXVZ!WJ]DV IURP7RROER[ /RDG3/&DUFKLYH
XSGDWHWJ] ES[B[[WRWKH
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW 3/&SURMHFW
5HPRYH86%IODVK 6,01&ැ
GULYH 3/&ැ /RDG3/&SURMHFW
6HWSDVVZRUG
1&83RZHU2)) /RDGGULYHDUFKLYH
1&83RZHU
2))" 1R
/RDG1&DUFKLYH
(1'
Figure 12-9 Automatic upgrade of the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive

12.1.2.3 Upgrading the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive
Flow diagram
8SJUDGHWKH&1&
VRIWZDUHZLWKD86%
IODVKGULYH
&UHDWH1&3/&GULYH
DUFKLYHRQ&RPSDFW)ODVK
FDUG3&8DQGRU86% YLDSDWFKFDEOH 5- WR1&8
IODVKGULYH ;,3
/RDG3/&SURMHFW
WR3&3* 67(3 2QO\LIQHZ7RROER[
QHFHVVDU\
,V86%IODVKGULYH ,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH1&8
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8 VHUYLFHV\VWHPRQ86%
1R IODVKGULYH
VHUYLFHV\VWHP"
2SHQ:LQGRZV
([SORUHU
,QVHUW86%IODVK
GULYHLQWR3&3*
1RWLFH)LOHQDPHRIFQFVZ!WJ]
ORZHUFDVHRQO\
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ]WR
86%IODVKGULYH URRW
IROGHU
5HPRYH86%IODVK
GULYH
6\VWHP7&8" 6\VWHP3&8"
1R
1&83RZHU2))
1&83RZHU &RQQHFWWKHVWDQGDUG3&
2))" 1R NH\ERDUGWRWKH86%)URQWRI
3&8RU23[
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYHLQWR 6,01&.ැ 6,01&.ැ

1&8 ; 3/&ැ 3/&ැ

Figure 12-10 Upgrading the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive

Flow diagram - continued system TCU (1)
1&83RZHU21
0DLQ0HQX)8SGDWH
1&86RIWZDUH
)8SGDWHV\VWHP
VRIWZDUHIURP86%
PHPRU\VWLFN
)8SGDWHV\VWHP
VRIWZDUHE\VHOHFWHGILOH
)2.FRQWLQXH
1RWLFH'RQRWRYHUZULWH
)WRFRQILUP EORFNVZLWKXVHUSURJUDP
HJ2%2%HWF
/RDG1&DUFKLYH
'LVSOD\6\QFLQJGLVN
1R
GRQH"
1HZ7RROER["
1R
1&83RZHU2)) 2SHQ 67(3 3/&

SURMHFW7RROER[
ES[B[[
5HPRYH86%IODVK
GULYH
&RS\QHZ7RROER[
6,01&.! ES[B[[EORFNVWR
3/&! /RDG3/&DUFKLYH
WKH3/&SURMHFW
1&83RZHU21
/RDG3/&SURMHFW
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
6,01&.!
3/&!
/RDGGULYHDUFKLYH
6HWSDVVZRUG
(1'
Figure 12-11 Upgrading the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive - continued (TCU system)

Flow diagram - continued PCU system (2)
&RQQHFW
3&8;[[[!1&8;
1&83&8;3RZHU
21
%RRW3&8LQVHUYLFHPRGH :LQGRZV;3
NH\!PDQXIDFWXUHUSDVVZRUG

6WDUW:LQ6&3 6WDUW91&YLHZHU
GHVNWRSLFRQ GHVNWRSLFRQ
/RJLQWR &RQQHFWWR

ZLWKXVHU
PDQXIDFW3:
6815,6( 0DLQ0HQX)
3RVVLEOHHUURUVF(5525 8SGDWH1&86RIWZDUH
XQNQRZQRSWLRQ
0HQX&RPPDQGV
XSGDWHGDWDFQFVZ!WJ]
!2SHQWHUPLQDO )8SGDWHV\VWHPVRIWZDUH
&DXVH6SDFHPLVVLQJ IURP86%PHPRU\VWLFN
EHWZHHQXSGDWHDQGGDWD
)8SGDWHV\VWHP
,QSXWVFUHVWRUHXSGDWH VRIWZDUHE\VHOHFWHGILOH
GDWDFQFVZ!WJ]
)2.FRQWLQXH
)WRFRQILUP
SURPSW
UHDSSHDUV"
1R
'LVSOD\6\QFLQJGLVN
GRQH" 1R
1&83RZHU2))
5HPRYH86%IODVK 1R
GULYH 1HZ7RROER["
/RDG3/&DUFKLYH
6,01&.!
3/&!
2SHQ 67(3
3/&SURMHFW
1&83RZHU21 EORFNVZLWKXVHUSURJUDP
7RROER[ES[B[[
HJ2%2%HWF
3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW &RS\QHZ7RROER[
ES[B[[EORFNVWR
6,01&.! WKH3/&SURMHFW /RDGGULYHDUFKLYH
3/&!
/RDGLQJ /RDG3/&SURMHFW
1&DUFKLYH
(1'
Figure 12-12 Upgrading the CNC software using USB-FlashDrive - continued (PCU system)

12.1.2.4 Upgrading the CNC software using WinSCP on PC/PG
Flow diagram
8SJUDGHWKH&1& ,IDFRQQHFWLRQLVQRWHVWDEOLVKHG
VRIWZDUHXVLQJ GHDFWLYDWHDQGWKHQUHDFWLYDWH
:LQ6&3RQ3&3* /RFDO$UHD&RQQHFWLRQXQGHU
1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLRQV
&UHDWH1&3/&GULYH
/RJLQWR
DUFKLYHRQ&RPSDFW)ODVK YLDSDWFKFDEOH ZLWKXVHUDGPLQ
FDUG3&8DQGRU86% 5- WR1&8; SDVVZRUG6815,6(
IODVKGULYH ,3
GDWDFRUUHVSRQGVWRWKH
/RDG3/&SURMHFW 2QO\LIQHZ7RROER[ 86%IODVKGULYHRQ1&8;
WR3&3* 67(3 QHFHVVDU\ &RPPDQGVPHQX
86%IODVKGULYH ැ2SHQWHUPLQDO 3RVVLEOHHUURU
VF(5525XQNQRZQRSWLRQ
XSGDWHGDWDFQFVZ!WJ]
,QSXWVFUHVWRUHXSGDWH &DXVH6SDFHPLVVLQJEHWZHHQ
,QVWDOODWLRQRIWKH GDWDFQFVZ!WJ] XSGDWHDQGGDWD
,V86%IODVKGULYH
1&8VHUYLFHV\VWHP
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8 1R RQ86%IODVKGULYH
VHUYLFHV\VWHP"
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ] 'LVSOD\6\QFLQJ
WR86%IODVKGULYH GLVNGRQH" 1R
URRWIROGHU
1&83RZHU2))
1&83RZHU2)) 5HPRYH86%IODVK
GULYH
1&83RZHU 1HZ7RROER["
2))" 1R 1R
6,01&.ැ
3/&ැ
2SHQ 67(3
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH
3/&SURMHFW
LQWR1&8 ; 1&83RZHU21 7RROER[ES[B[[
&RQQHFW1&8 ; ඼ 3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW

3&3* &RS\QHZ7RROER[
ES[B[[EORFNVWR /RDG3/&DUFKLYH
6,01&.ැ WKH3/&SURMHFW
1&83RZHU21 3/&ැ
6WDUW:LQ6&3RQ3&3* 6HWSDVVZRUG
/RDG3/&SURMHFW
/RDG1&DUFKLYH
/RDGGULYHDUFKLYH
EORFNVZLWKXVHUSURJUDP (1'
HJ2%2%HWF
Figure 12-13 Upgrading the CNC software using WinSCP on PG/PC

12.1.2.5 Upgrading the CNC software using VNC Viewer on PC/PG
Flow diagram
8SJUDGHWKH&1&
VRIWZDUHXVLQJ91&
9LHZHURQ3&3* 91&VHUYHULQSXW
,IDFRQQHFWLRQLVQRWHVWDEOLVKHG
GHDFWLYDWHDQGWKHQUHDFWLYDWH
/RFDO$UHD&RQQHFWLRQXQGHU
&UHDWH1&3/&GULYH
0DLQPHQX) 1HWZRUNFRQQHFWLRQV
DUFKLYHRQ&RPSDFW YLDSDWFKFDEOH 5- 8SGDWH1&8VRIWZDUH
)ODVKFDUG&8DQGRU WR1&8;ZLWK
86%IODVKGULYH ,3
)8SGDWHV\VWHPVRIWZDUH
/RDG3/&SURMHFW IURP86%PHPRU\VWLFN
2QO\LIQHZ7RROER[
67(3 WR3&3* 1&83RZHU21
QHFHVVDU\
)8SGDWHV\VWHP
VRIWZDUHE\VHOHFWHGILOH 3/&JHQHUDOUHVHW
)2.FRQWLQXH 6,01&ැ
,VWKH1&8VHUYLFH 3/&ැ
,V86%IODVKGULYH
V\VWHPLQVWDOOHGRQ
DYDLODEOHZLWK1&8 1R )WRFRQILUP
86%IODVKGULYH"
VHUYLFHV\VWHP" 6HWSDVVZRUG
/RDG1&DUFKLYH
&RS\FQFVZ!WJ] 'LVSOD\6\QFLQJ
GLVNGRQH" 1R
WR86%IODVKGULYH
URRWIROGHU
1&83RZHU2)) 1HZ7RROER["
1R
5HPRYH86%IODVK
1&83RZHU2)) GULYH 2SHQ3/&SURMHFW
67(3 7RROER[
1&83RZHU ES[B[[
2))" 1R
6,01&ැ
3/&ැ
&RS\QHZEORFNV
IURP7RROER[ /RDG3/&DUFKLYH
,QVHUW86%IODVKGULYH
ES[B[[WRWKH3/&
LQWR1&8 ;
SURMHFW
&RQQHFW1&8 ;
DQG3&3* /RDG3/&SURMHFW
EORFNVZLWK3/&SURJUDP
1&83RZHU21 HJ2%2%HWF
/RDGGULYHDUFKLYH
6WDUW91&9LHZHURQ
3&3*
(1'
Figure 12-14 Upgrading the CNC software using VNC Viewer on PC/PG

12.2 With the help of the "Create MyConfig" software
Precondition
The "Create MyConfig" software on PG/PC is the precondition to configure a package.
Basic procedure
The descriptions for automatically reinstalling/upgrading using Create MyConfig include the
basic steps for configuring and subsequent automatic execution at the control system. The
"Create MyConfig" software has integrated online help.
12.2.1 Reinstallation with Create MyConfig
Preconditions
The following preconditions must be met for the CompactFlash card of the NCU:
● The CompactFlash card of the NCU is empty or contains executable NCU software.
If any CNC software and possibly irrelevant user data are on the CompactFlash card, then
these are lost when the software is newly installed.
● You have a <name>.tgz file (cnc-sw.tgz ) with the actual software.
● You want to initiate a new installation of the NCU via a USB FlashDrive.
● If the CompactFlash card is empty or does not contain executable CNC software, you need
a USB FlashDrive with installed "NCU Service System".
Operating sequence
In order to configure a package for the reinstallation of the CNC software with "Create MyConfig
Expert":
1. Start the "Create MyConfig Expert" software.
With this software you configure an Installer package that initiates a reinstallation from the
USB Flashdrive to the CompactFlash card of the NCU.
2. Create a new project via the menu "Project" > "New".

3. Activate the "NCU" area under the "Package" tab.
4. Activate the "NCU software" window from the "Dialogs" tab.

5. In the context menu, select > right mouse button > "Edit mode for all dialog boxes" >
"Automatic".
6. In the "CNC software" window under "Installation", select the "New installation" mode.
7. For the file "<name>.tgz" you have the following options:

– The file is embedded in the project or linked to the project.
For the automatic reinstallation, insert the "<name>.tgz" file in the project under "CNC
software (*.tgz)". To do this, enter the name of the tgz file in the "Preselection" area.
– Copy the file to the USB FlashDrive in the root directory in which the package is stored
subsequently. The file is automatically selected while the package is running.
Enter the name with the prefix "./" <name>.tgz in the "Preselection" field under "CNC
software (*.tgz)":

8. Create a package "<name>.usz" via the menu "File" > "Transfer" > "Linux package (NCU)
and select as target path the root directory of the USB FlashDrive.
Create MyConfig Expert saves the project, performs a validation run, creates and saves the
package under the specified target path.
A "<name>.usz" package is then located in the root directory of the USB FlashDrive.
Depending on the configuration in the previous step, the "<name>.tgz" file is also located
next to the package.
Note
The USB FlashDrive must only be bootable if the CompactFlash card of the NCU does not
contain executable CNC system software.
9. Insert the USB FlashDrive into a USB socket (X125 or X135) of the NCU.
10.Switch the control system off and on again.
Provided that when configuring you configured the "Edit mode of all dialogs" > "Automatic",
then the package is automatically executed when the control system boots-up. The dialogs
are displayed, but require no operator actions.
The CNC software has been installed once the package has been completed.
A logbook about the activities that have been performed can be saved. The logbook
documents all activities performed during the new installation.
11.Switch-off the control system.
12.Remove the USB FlashDrive.
13.Commissioning work can continue after the control system has been switched on.
Optional additional functions for the installation of the CNC software

In the same package - after the CNC software has been installed - the following actions can be
optionally configured, which can either run completely automatically or conditionally at the
machine:
● Loading an SDB Archive
● SINAMICS device configuration
● Renaming DO, SINAMICS components and DO numbers
● Assignment of the drives to NC axes
● Manipulation of display machine data
● Manipulation of individual NC and drive data
● Loading the PLC program or from individual blocks
● Installing software
● Copying, deleting and manipulating files on the CompactFlash card
● Conditional execution of actions, executing, deleting, copying and manipulating
● Messages and interactions to the operator

12.2.2 Upgrade with Create MyConfig
Introduction
Note
For details on upgrading the CNC software versions, read the "siemensd.rtf" (German) or
"siemense.rtf" (English) file on the product CD of Create MyConfig.
When the software is upgraded, all user data is kept on the CompactFlash card and in the
control areas NC, PLC, and drives. The NC and drive data is automatically transferred into the
new CNC software version. Archives neither have to be created nor imported again.
The "NCK commissioning switch" and "PLC mode selector switch" remain during the upgrade
in position "0".
In conjunction with an upgrade, using the same package, the automatic generation of a backup
can be configured, which is then stored on the USB FlashDrive. It is not necessary to first
generate an archive.
Note
After the CNC software has been upgraded, adaptations may be required. Using the Create
MyConfig Expert, these adaptations can also be configured and therefore automatically
executed.
For information about the necessary adaptations, please refer to the upgrade instructions of the
respective CNC software versions.
Operating sequence
In order to configure a package for the upgrade of the CNC software with "Create MyConfig
Expert":
1. You have started the "Create MyConfig Expert" software.
Using this software, you configure a package that initiates an upgrade of the CNC software
on the CompactFlash card of the NCU.
2. You have created a new project via the menu "Project" > "New".

3. Activate the "NCU" area under the "Package" tab.
4. Activate the "NCU software" window from the "Dialogs" tab.

5. In the context menu, select > right mouse button > "Edit mode for all dialog boxes" >
"Automatic".
6. In the "CNC software" window under "Installation", select the "Upgrade" mode.
7. For the <name>.tgz files you have the following options:

– The file is embedded in the project or linked to the project.
For the automatic reinstallation, insert the "<name>.tgz" file in the project under "CNC
software (*.tgz)". To do this, enter the name of the tgz file in the "Preselection" area.
– Copy the file to the USB FlashDrive in the root directory in which the package is stored
subsequently. The file is automatically selected while the package is running.
Enter the name with the prefix "./" <name>.tgz in the "Preselection" field under "CNC
software (*.tgz)":

8. Create a package "<name>.usz" via the menu "File" > "Transfer" > "Linux package (NCU)
and select as target path the root directory of the USB FlashDrive.
Create MyConfig Expert saves the project, performs a validation run, creates and saves the
package under the specified target path.
A "<name>.usz" package is then located in the root directory of the USB FlashDrive.
Depending on the configuration in the previous step, the "<name>.tgz" file is also located
next to the package.
9. Insert the USB FlashDrive into a USB socket (X125 or X135) of the NCU.
10.Switch the control system off and on again.
Provided that when configuring you configured the "Edit mode of all dialogs" → "Automatic",
then the package is automatically executed when the control system boots-up. The CNC
software has been upgraded and all data is available again after the package has been
completed on the NCU.
A logbook about the activities that have been performed can be saved. The logbook
documents all activities performed during the upgrade.
11.Switch-off the control system.
12.Remove the USB FlashDrive.
13.The machine is ready for operation again after switch-on.
Optional additional functions when upgrading the CNC software

In the same package - after the CNC software has been installed - the following actions can be
optionally configured, which can either run completely automatically or conditionally at the
machine:
● Manipulation of display machine data
● Manipulation of individual NC and drive data
● Loading the PLC program or from individual blocks
● Installing software
● Copying, deleting and manipulating files on the CompactFlash card
● Conditional execution of actions, executing, deleting, copying and manipulating
● Messages and interactions to the operator


Appendix
A
A.1 Abbreviations
ACX Compressed format for XML

APC Advanced Position Control (SINUMERIK option M13)
AUTO AUTO mode: Continuous and automatic execution of programs
BERO Proximity limit switch
BI Binector Input
BICO Binector Connector
BO Binector Output
CI Connector Input
CNC Computerized Numerical Control:Computerized numerical control
CO Connector Output
CoL Certificate of License
CP Communication Processor: Communications processor
CPU Central Processing Unit:Central processing unit
CU Contol Unit
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol: Protocol for automatic assignment of IP
addresses from a DHCP server to a client computer.
DO Drive Object: Drive object
DP Distributed I/O
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRF Differenzial Resolver Funktion: Differential function for rotary resolver
DRIVE-CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC Dynamic Stiffness Control: Dynamic stiffness control
DWORD Doubleword
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device
EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
EN European standard
EPos Basic positioning (SINAMICS S120)
GECOS General Electric Comprehensive Operating System: Information about the identity
of a user under Linux
GSD Device master file
GUD Global User Data
IPO Interpolator
JOG JOG mode: manual mode for setting up the machine
LAN Local Area Network
LED Light-Emitting Diode: Light-emitting-diode display
LUD Local User Data

A.1 Abbreviations
MD Machine Data
MDI MDI mode (Manual Data Automatic): Enter program blocks manually and execute
MM Motor Module
MCP Machine Control Panel
NC Numerical Control: Numerical control
PIO Process Image Output
PII Process Image Input
PCU PC Unit: computer unit
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PG Programming device
PLC Programmable Logic Control: (component of the CNC)
PM Power Module
PUD Program global User Data
RAM Random Access Memory: Program memory that can be read and written
REF POINT Function for approaching the reference point in JOG mode.
REPOS Function for repositioning in JOG mode
SD Setting Data
SLM Smart Line Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Mounted
SME Sensor Module Externally Mounted
TEACH IN Function for creating programs in interactive mode with the machine in MDI and
AUTO modes
TCU Thin Client Unit
USB Universal Serial Bus
XML Extensible Markup Language

A.2 Information about third-party software used

Copyright 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Printed in the United States of America.
All Rights Reserved.
This software product (LICENSED PRODUCT), implementing the Object Management
Group's "Internet Inter-ORB Protocol", is protected by copyright and is distributed under the
following license restricting its use. Portions of LICENSED PRODUCT may be protected by one
or more U.S. or foreign patents, or pending applications.
LICENSED PRODUCT is made available for your use provided that you include this license
and copyright notice on all media and documentation and the software program in which this
product is incorporated in whole or part. You may copy, modify, distribute, or sublicense the
LICENCED PRODUCT without charge as part of a product or software program developed by
you, so long as you preserve the functionality of interoperating with the Object Management
Group's "Internet Inter-ORB Protocol" version one. However, any uses other than the foregoing
uses shall require the express written consent of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
The names of Sun Microsystems, Inc. and any of its subsidiaries or affiliates may not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the LICENSED PRODUCT as permitted
herein. This license is effective until terminated by Sun for failure to comply with this license.
Upon termination, you shall destroy or return all code and documentation for the LICENSED
PRODUCT.
LICENSED PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
LICENSED PRODUCT IS PROVIDED WITH NO SUPPORT AND WITHOUT ANY
OBLIGATION ON THE PART OF SUN OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES TO
ASSIST IN ITS USE, CORRECTION, MODIFICATION OR ENHANCEMENT. SUN OR ANY
OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO
THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY
LICENSED PRODUCT OR ANY PART THEREOF.
IN NO EVENT WILL SUN OR ANY OF ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST REVENUE OR PROFITS OR OTHER SPECIAL, INDIRECT AND
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF SUN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
DFARS 252.227-7013 and FAR 52.227-19.
SunOS, SunSoft, Sun, Solaris, Sun Microsystems and the Sun logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SunSoft, Inc.
2550 Garcia Avenue
Mountain View, California 94043
Copyright (c) 1991 by AT&T.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is
hereby granted, provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which

is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting
documentation for such software.
THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR AT&T MAKES ANY
REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE
MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
QLocale's data is based on Common Locale Data Repository v1.6.1.
Note
You can find additional information on the product DVD in the Readme_OSS file about the third-
party software used.

A.3 Documentation overview SINUMERIK 840D sl

*HQHUDOGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO
'
$GYHUWLVLQJEURFKXUH &DWDORJ1& &DWDORJ30 6\VWHP0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO

&WUO(QHUJ\ 6PDUWPDFKLQHWRRO
RSHUDWLRQ
8VHUGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
' ' ' 6,1$0,&6
6
2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO &UHDWH0\&RQILJ 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ8QLYHUVDO 2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO ದ)XQGDPHQWDOV ದ,627XUQLQJ $ODUPV
ದ7XUQLQJ ದ-RE3ODQQLQJ ದ,620LOOLQJ
ದ0LOOLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJ&\FOHV
ದ*ULQGLQJ
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
6,1$0,&6 6,1$0,&6
6 6
(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO /LVWV0DQXDO

ದ1&8 *XLGHOLQHVIRU ದ&1&1&.3/& ದ0DFKLQHGDWD
ದ2SHUDWRUFRPSRQHQWV PDFKLQHFRQILJXUDWLRQ 'ULYH ದ,QWHUIDFHVLJQDOV
DQGQHWZRUNLQJ ದ%DVHVRIWZDUHDQG ದ9DULDEOHV
ದ$', RSHUDWLQJVRIWZDUH
0DQXIDFWXUHU6HUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO
' 6,1$0,&6
6
)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO

ದ%DVLFIXQFWLRQV 7RROPDQDJHPHQW 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG ದ(0&LQVWDOODWLRQJXLGHOLQH
ದ([WHQGHG)XQFWLRQV ದ,QGXVWULDOVHFXULW\
ದ6SHFLDO)XQFWLRQV
ದ6\QFKURQL]HG$FWLRQV
ದ,62'LDOHFWV
,QIR7UDLQLQJ (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'2&RQ&' ,QGXVWU\2QOLQH ,QGXVWU\0DOO

6XSSRUW 6,26
7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWDWLRQ 7RRODQG0ROG
ದ6LPSOHPLOOLQJ 0DNLQJ0DQXDO
ZLWK6KRS0LOO
ದ6LPSOHWXUQLQJ
ZLWK6KRS7XUQ

SINUMERIK documentation
Manual Title
Equipment Manual NCU 7x0.3B PN SIOS (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs
/de/en/view/99922219)
Function Manual Basic functions SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763231)
Function Manual Extended functions SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763228)
Function Manual Special functions SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763229)
Function Manual Synchronized actions SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763230)
Lists Manual Machine data and parameters SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763238)
Lists Manual NC variables and interface signals SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/109763239)
SIMOTICS Service Manual 1FK7, 1FT7 encoder replacement SIOS (https://
/de/en/view/99457853)
SINAMICS S120 documentation
Manual Title
Equipment Manual Booksize power units /GH2/ (https://
/ww/en/view/109763282)
Commissioning Manual Commissioning with Startdrive /IH1/ (https://
/ww/en/view/109763294)
Lists Manual Parameters, function diagrams, faults /LH1/ (https://
and alarms support.industry.siemens.com/cs
/ww/en/view/109763271)
Function Manual Drive functions /FH1/ (https://
/ww/en/view/109763287)
Function Manual Safety Integrated /FHS/ (https://
/ww/en/view/109763292)

Index
Create MyConfig, 368
Current control loop, 284
A Measuring method, 314
CYCLE791, 246
Access levels, 35
Adaptations
Moment of inertia, 251
Overview, 256
D
Position, 253 Data backup
Velocity, 253 Point in time, 341
ALM identification, 203 Data set
Assigning device names, 79 Add, 152
Assignment procedure, 220 Boundary condition, 150
Automatic servo tuning, 284, 285 Drive (DDS), 150
Generate report, 304 Encoder (EDS), 150
Path interpolation, 300 Modify, 158
Tuning log, 295, 299 Motor (MDS), 150
Axis assignment, 222 Remove, 156
Axis strategy, 288 DC link identification, 202
Details, 51
Diagnostics
B Drive system, 173
Trace, 159
Backing up tuning results, 232
Drive
BICO interconnections, 108
Assign axis, 218
Brake behavior OFF3, 209
Faults, 174
PLC-controlled, 262
PROFIBUS DP, 262
C Warnings, 174
Catalog motor, 125 Drive components, 208
Certificate of License (CoL), 40, 44 Drive Object,
Channel axes, 221 Activate, 188
Circularity test, 284 Deactivation, 187
Backing up, 336 Delete, 189
Examples of the position setpoint filter, 334 Drive system
Optimization example 1, 334 Activate drives, 198
Optimization example 2, 335 Diagnostics, 173
Optimization example 3, 335 Drive Unit
Perform measurement, 332 Configuration, 175
Setting parameters, 332 Topology,
Coding switches, 30 Drive wizard, 123
Commissioning archive
Creating, 344
Reading in, 344 E
CompactFlash card, 39, 44
Electronic rating plate, 198
Compliance - definition, 242
Configuration
Change, 182
Sorting, 183
F
Control mode, 129 Factory settings, 142

Index
Filter, 284
Example, 329
Type, 329 L
Firmware update, 144
License, 44
Firmware version
License database, 42
Sensor Module, 201
License information, 39
SINAMICS S120, 200
License key, 39, 45
Friction compensation
License number, 45
Automatic sequence, 234
Line checksum, 344
Example, 238
Manual sequence, 235
Torque injection pulse, 240
Tuning quality:, 233
M
Velocity injection pulse, 234, 235 Machine axes, 221
Function generator MD13160 $MN_SINAMICS_MAX_SLAVE_ADDRES
Connection point, 326 S, 263
Parameter, 328 Measuring functions, 311
Positioning monitoring, 326 Cancel, 312
Start, 312
Monitoring the line voltage, 202
G
Geometry axes, 221
N
NCK commissioning switch, 30
H NCU interfaces, 29
Nodding compensation
Hardware configuration, 51
deactivate, 245
Hardware reference, 39
Measuring technique, 243
Hardware serial number, 39, 44
Option, 242
Part program, 248
Trace, 247
I
Infeed
Configuration, 114 O
Initial commissioning, 113
Option, 45
Line data, 201
Overview, 119
Parallel connection, 121
Power data, 116
P
Saving the configuration, 119 Parameter
Summary, 118 Speed setpoint before/after filter, 328
Terminal wiring, 117 Password
Intelligent dynamic response adjustment change, 37
Function, 253 Rules, 36
Option, 253 Set, 36
Intelligent load adjustment PLC
Function, 251 Changing the operating state, 343
Option, 251 Communication setup, 47
Interpolation, 300 Mode selector switch, 30
Interpolation axes, 285 Position control loop, 284
Isochronous operation, 67 Measurement sequence, 322
Isochronous Real Time (IRT), 66 Measuring procedure, 320

Index
Reference frequency response, 323 Optional rules, 204

Setpoint ramp, 323 Target/actual comparison, 184
Setpoint step, 323 Topology display (graphic), 179
Position controller strategy, 291 Trace
Process data (PZD), 217 Cursor, 168
PROFIBUS connection, 214 New session, 159
PROFIBUS telegram type, 129 Scale, 167
PROFINET Servo variables, 163
Configuration, 68 Session type, 159
Connection, 70 Zoom, 163
IO system, 71 Tuning
PROFINET IO, 66 1 axis, 234
PROFIsafe, 77 2 axes, 234
Tuning functions, 284
Tuning objective
R Conservative/robust responsiveness, 292
Maximum responsiveness, 292
Reinstallation of the CNC software, 351
Moderate responsiveness, 292
Replacing a motor component, 196
Tuning sequence, 283
Replacing a Motor Module, 197
Tuning strategy, 288
S U
SIMATIC Manager, 47
Upgrade
SIMATIC S7 project, 48
Create MyConfig, 372
SINUMERIK 840D sl Toolbox, 28
Service system, 351
Software product, 39
User views, 230
Speed adjustment, 209
Speed control loop, 284
Measuring method, 315
Speed controller strategy, 289
W
System utilization, 259 Web License Manager, 41
T
Technology
Milling, 230
Turning, 230
Telegram
Manufacturer-specific, 216
Number of encoders, 219
Standard, 216
Terminal assignment, 106
Inputs/outputs, 106
NCU - X122, 103, 104
NCU - X132, 104, 105
NCU - X142, 105
NX1x.3, 106
Third-party motor, 131
Topology
Delete the component, 191
Obligatory rules, 203

Index


840Dsl CNC Commiss Man en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

840Dsl CNC Commiss Man en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

840Dsl CNC Commiss Man en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Saving and managing data 11

New installation / upgrading 12

CNC software Version 4.92

Siemens AG A5E44860208B AB Copyright © Siemens AG 2006 - 2019.

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

Note regarding the General Data Protection Regulation

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

6.4.3 Firmware update of the drive components...........................................................................143

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

7.6.3 Drive assignment .................................................................................................................225

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

10.3.3 Example: How to tune the X1 axis .......................................................................................293

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

1.4 Industrial security

Further information is provided on the Internet:

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

Steps for commissioning SINUMERIK 840D sl

Figure 2-1 Commissioning process

Step 1: Commissioning the NC, PLC, drive

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

2.2 SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration

SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration with SINAMICS S120 Booksize

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.RSHUDWRUSDQHOIURQWZLWK7&8 6,180(5,.

6,180(5,.'VOZLWK 1; 6,1$0,&66

Figure 2-2 Example: Configuration with SINAMICS S120 Booksize

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

SINUMERIK 840D sl configuration with SINAMICS S120 Combi

6SLQGOHPRWRU3+ ).IHHG ).IHHG

Figure 2-3 Example: Configuration with SINAMICS S120 Combi

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

2.3 Procedure for the initial commissioning

Checking the system

Variants for the commissioning process

Commissioning with current CNC software

Sequence Reference to Chapter

Reinstallation of the CNC software

Sequence Reference to Chapter

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

Sequence Reference to Chapter

Upgrading the CNC software

Sequence Reference to Chapter

CNC Commissioning: NC, PLC, Drive

2.4 Procedure when tuning axes and drives

Recommended tuning sequence

6,180(5,.'VOZLWK 1; 6,1$0,&66

6SLQGOHPRWRU3+ ).IHHG ).IHHG